L PRO 2100 Manual

L-PRO
Line Protection Relay

Model 2100, 2100E
User Manual
Version 5.0 Rev 0
Preface
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2015 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. is strictly forbidden.
This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes
detailed drawings and operation. Users should evaluate the information in the
context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular
applications. ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental, indirect or
consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation.
While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance
with accepted engineering practices, ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the
completeness of the information.
All trademarks used in association with B-PRO, Multi Busbar Protection, F-
PRO, iTMU, L-PRO, ProLogic, S-PRO, T-PRO, TESLA, I/O Expansion
Module, TESLA Control Panel, Relay Control Panel, RecordGraph and
RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd.
Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
HyperTerminal® is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve.
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Modicon.
Contact Information
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd.
Website: www.erlphase.com
Email: [email protected]
Technical Support
Email: [email protected]
Tel: 1-204-477-0591
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 i

Using This Guide
This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the L-PRO line
protection relay. It is intended to support the first time user and clarify the de-
tails of the equipment.
The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:
example Describes
Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

tings submenu on the Start menu.
Right-click Click the right mouse button.
Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.
service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.
Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information.
.. Indicates more screens.
Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

play list.
Indicates a warning.
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 iii

Table of Contents
Preface ......................................................................................i
Contact Information ...................................................................i
Using This Guide ..................................................................... iii
Table of Contents .....................................................................v
Version Compatibility .............................................................. vii
1 Overview ................................................................. 1-1
Front View........................................................................ 1-2
Rear View ........................................................................ 1-3
Optional I/O Rear View .................................................... 1-5
Model Options/Ordering................................................... 1-6
2 Setup and Communications.................................. 2-1
Power Supply................................................................... 2-1
IRIG-B Time Input ............................................................ 2-1
Communicating with the Relay (IED) ............................... 2-2
Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s User Interface2-5
Setting the Baud Rate...................................................... 2-7
Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services.......................... 2-8
Communication Port Details ............................................ 2-9
Maintenance Menu ........................................................ 2-12
Firmware Update ........................................................... 2-15
3 Using the IED (Getting Started) ............................ 3-1
Start-up Sequence ........................................................... 3-1
Front Panel Display.......................................................... 3-2
Terminal Mode ................................................................. 3-5
Metering Data ................................................................ 3-16
4 Protection Functions and Specifications ............ 4-1
Protection and Recording Functions................................ 4-1
Communication-Aided Scheme ..................................... 4-40
Recording Functions ...................................................... 4-45
Logging Functions.......................................................... 4-47
5 Offliner Settings Software ..................................... 5-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 5-1
Installing PC Software...................................................... 5-2
Offliner Features .............................................................. 5-2
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 v

Table of Contents
Handling Backward Compatibility .................................... 5-4

RecordBase View Software ............................................. 5-5
Main Branches from the Tree View.................................. 5-6
Settings From a Record ................................................. 5-24
6 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide ...... 6-1
Acceptance Testing ......................................................... 6-1
L-PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline .................... 6-4
7 Installation .............................................................. 7-1
Physical Mounting............................................................ 7-1
AC and DC Wiring............................................................ 7-1
Communication Wiring..................................................... 7-1
8 Cyber Security........................................................ 8-1
System Access Control and Authorisation....................... 8-1
Cyber Security Event Monitoring and Logging................. 8-3
Cyber Security Notification message format.................... 8-4
IP Ports and Services ...................................................... 8-7
IEEE 1686 Table of Compliance...................................... 8-8
Appendix A IED Specifications..................................... A-1
Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal
Frequency ........................................................................ A-4
Frequency Element Operating Time Curves.................... A-8
External Input Pickup Filter .............................................. A-9
Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges ......................... B-1
Appendix C Hardware Description ............................... C-1
Appendix D Event Messages ....................................... D-1
Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol .... E-1
Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile ................................. F-1
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings ...............................G-1
Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings................................ H-1
Appendix I AC Schematic Drawings ............................. I-1
Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings ............................J-1
Appendix K Function Logic Diagram............................ K-1
Appendix L L-PRO Setting Example ............................ L-1
Switching Setting Groups................................................. L-2
79 Auto-recloser examples .............................................. L-9
Index ..........................................................................................I
vi L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Version Compatibility
This chart indicates the versions of Offliner Settings, RecordBase View and
the User Manual which are compatible with different versions of L-PRO firm-
ware.
RecordBase View and Offliner Settings are backward compatible with all ear-
lier versions of records and setting files. You can use RecordBase View to view
records produced by any version of L-PRO firmware and Offliner Settings can
create and edit older setting file versions.
Minor releases (designated with a letter suffix - e.g. v3.1a) maintain the same
compatibility as their base version. For example. L-PRO firmware v3.1c and
Offliner Settings v3.1a are compatible.
L-PRO Firmware/Software Compatibility Guide
L-PRO Setting File

Compatible Offliner Settings
Firmware Version
v5.0 12 4000 v2.0 and greater
v4.0a 12 4000 v2.0 and greater
v4.0 12 4000 v2.0 and greater
v3.5a 12 v3.5 or greater
v3.5 12 v3.5 or greater
v3.3e 10 v3.3 or greater
v3.3d 10 v3.3 or greater
v3.3c 10 v3.3 or greater
v3.3b 10 v3.3 or greater
v3.2c 9 v3.2 or greater
Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History.
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 vii

1 Overview
Introduction The L-PRO (model 2100) is a microprocessor-based relay providing compre-
hensive distance based line protection, fault oscillography, dynamic swing re-
cording and event logging with one integrated technology.
The primary protection is line protection with 4 zones of phase and ground dis-
tance functions – user-defined Mho or quadrilateral shapes and communication
based schemes.
To provide a complete package of protection and control L-PRO provides oth-
er functions such as:
• 1.0 to 1.3 cycle operation at 80% reach, ideal for transmission line appli-
cations
• ring bus capability – breaker failure and individual breaker monitoring
• 4-shot recloser with dead line/dead bus control and sync check
• ProLogic addresses special protection needs
• 8 setting groups with setting group logic
• back up overcurrent protection
• over/under rate of change frequency devices
• Optional expanded I/O, up to 20 external inputs and 21 outputs
L-PRO has 2 working modes—online and offline. In the online mode you can
use any communication software package (e.g. Procomm or HyperTerminal)
to connect to the L-PRO using VT100 terminal emulation. In online mode you
can:
• change and review relay settings
• view event and metering information
• initiate and retrieve recordings, and retrieve settings
L-PRO Line Protection Relay
L-PRO Relay Functional

Line Protection
Model 2100 1999 JUN 07 IRIG-B Functional
Target
Service Required
Date & View View Prev Next Clear Test Mode
Time Readings Logs Target
Alarm
Port 1
Offline Mode - Settings Software
Online Mode - Terminal Mode
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 1-1

1 Overview
In offline mode you can use Offliner Settings and RecordBase View software
to:
• create and review relay settings
• analyze fault waveforms
• store records
In addition to the protection functions L-PRO provides fault recording (96
samples/cycle) to facilitate analysis of the power system after a disturbance has
taken place. The triggers for fault recording are established by programming
the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function or any external input
to initiate recording.
Bus 2 Bus 1
50 50 Rec.
LS 79
CT BF
PT
Σ 21P 21N 68 50/67 51/67 50N/
67
51N/
67
46/50
/67
46/51
/67
5050N
/67
Rec.
4 Zones 4 Zones Dead

50 79 Line
Rec. Pickup
BF
52-1 CT
50
LS Rec.
PL
27 59 60 81 W.I. Rec. 25/27 Rec. 59 27

52-2 /59
Swing Recording Fault Recording

6 Analog 9 External 14 Output Contacts Positive Sequence Voltage 6 Voltages
Line PT Currents Inputs 1 Relay Inoperative Positive Sequence Current 12 Currents
Alarm Contact System Frequency Protection Elements
External Inputs
Optional I/O 11 External 7 Output Contacts Active Setting Group
Inputs
Figure 1.1: L-PRO Function Line Diagram
Front View
1 2 3

Model 2100 IRIG-B Functional
Target
Date & View View Clear Service Required
Time Readings Logs Previous Next Target
Test Mode
Alarm
Port 1
1. Front display of time, alarms and relay target

6 5 4
2. Relay target LED (red)
3. LEDs indicating status of relay
4. Communications serial port 1 for laptop computer
5. Clear target push button
6. Push buttons to manipulate information on LED display
Figure 1.2: L-PRO Front View
1-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

1 Overview
Rear View
7 8 9 10 11 12
125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC Network IRIG-B Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
External
13 Inputs
+ 1 - + 2 - + 3 - + 4 - + 5 - + 6 - + 7 - + 8 - + 9 -
Direct / Modem SCADA
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
Unused
14 Output
Contacts Relay
Inoperative Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 Out 5 Out 6 Out 7 Out 8 Out 9 Out 10 Out 11 Out 12 Out 13 Out 14
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
Power
15 In, Freq. Main AC Line Currents Aux. AC Line Currents AC Current Inputs Aux. AC Volts Unused Main AC Volts Supply
Nominal
48 - 250 Vdc
5A, 60Hz I1 A I1 B I1 C I2 A I2 B I2 C I3 A I3 B I3 C I4 A I4 B I4 C VA VB VC N VA VB VC N + - 120 Vac
Case Gnd
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
7. Port 5 - 10BaseT Ethernet Port/Internal Modem (optional)

8. External clock, IRIG-B modulated or unmodulated
9. Port 2 - Direct/Modem RS-232 Port
10. Port 3 - SCADA
11. Port 4 - unused
12. Case ground
13. 9 programmable external inputs (1 to 9)
14. This row contains 2 distinct areas from left to right:
14 programmable output relay contacts and relay inoperative contact
15. This row contains 3 distinctive areas from left to right:
Main and Auxiliary AC Line Currents (6 each) - for protection and recording
AC Current Inputs 2–3 phase current groups - for recording and 50LS function
Main and Auxiliary AC Voltage - for protection and recording
Power supply
Figure 1.3: L-PRO Rear View

1 Overview
AC Current and L-PRO is provided with terminal blocks for up to 12 ac currents and 6 phase to
Voltage Inputs neutral voltages.
Each of the current input circuits has polarity (•) marks.
A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown, for details see
“AC Schematic Drawings” in Appendix I and “DC Schematic Drawings”
in Appendix J.
External Inputs The L-PRO Relay contains 9 programmable external inputs. External dc volt-
age of either 48/125 volts or 125/250 volts nominal are possible depending on
the range provided.
Output Relay The L-PRO Relay has 14 output relay contacts. Each contact is programmable
Contacts and has breaker tripping capability. All output contacts are isolated from each
other. The dropout time for each output contact is configurable.
Relay Inoperative If the relay becomes inoperative, then the Relay Inoperative Alarm output con-
Alarm Output tact closes and all tripping functions are blocked.

1 Overview
Optional I/O Rear View
125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC Network IRIG-B Port2 Port 3 Port4
External Direct / Modem SCADA
Inputs
+ 1 - + 2 - + 3 - + 4 - + 5 - + 6 - + 7 - + 8 - + 9 -
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
External 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC Output Contacts
16 Inputs + 10 - + 11 - + 12 - + 13 - + 14 - + 15 - + 16 - + 17 - + 18 - + 19 - + 20 - Out 15 Out 16 Out 17 Out 18 Out 19 Out 20 Out 21
400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435
Output Unused
Relay
Contacts Inoperative Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 Out 5 Out 6 Out 7 Out 8 Out 9 Out 10 Out 11 Out 12 Out 13 Out 14
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
Power Nominal
In, Freq. Main AC Line Currents Aux. AC Line Currents AC Current Inputs Aux. AC Volts Unused Main AC Volts Supply
48 - 250 Vdc
Case Gnd
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
16. This row contains 2 distinctive areas from left to right:

11 programmable external inputs
7 programmable output relay contacts
Figure 1.4: Rear View of Optional I/O Model
Optional External The L-PRO Relay (model 2100E) contains 11 additional programmable exter-
Inputs nal inputs. External dc voltage of either 48/125 volts or 125/250 volts are pos-
sible depending on the range provided.
Optional Output The L-PRO Relay (model 2100E) contains 7 additional output relay contacts.
Relay Contacts Each contact is programmable and has breaker tripping capability. All output
contacts are isolated from each other. The dropout time for each output contact
is configurable.

1 Overview
Model Options/Ordering
L-PRO is available for either horizontal or vertical mount, for details see “Me-
chanical Drawings” in Appendix G.
L-PRO is available with an internal modem card or internal modem network
card.
The CT inputs are 1 A nominal or 5 A nominal. The external inputs are 48/125
Vdc or 125/250 Vdc. The system base frequency is either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The L-PRO is available with an optional I/O board as described above.
All of the above options must be specified at the time of ordering.
Relay Method of Memory Polarization
The 21P and 21N mho elements use positive-sequence voltage, derived
from a memory voltage, as the polarizing quantity. Sufficient positive-
sequence voltage should be available during all fault events. However,
during certain fault events, especially three-phase bolted faults near the
line VT location, the positive-sequence voltage may be insufficient for
correct operation. To ensure adequate positive-sequence voltage exists
for all fault conditions, the L-PRO uses a ring filter, implemented in
software, to provide memory voltage as the source for the positive-se-
quence voltage. This memory voltage lasts for approximately 150 cy-
cles, even if all voltage inputs from the line VTs go to zero. A practical
effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the mho characteristic
by the source impedance. This expansion of the characteristic ensures
correct operation for zero voltage faults at the relay location, and for for-
ward capacitive faults.
X
No Memory
Voltage
Line Z
Full
Memory
Voltage
R
Z
rce
Sou

2 Setup and Communications
Power Supply
A wide range power supply is standard. The nominal operating range is 48 to
250 Vdc, 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz. To protect against a possible short circuit in the
supply use an inline fuse or circuit breaker with a 5 A rating. Make the chassis
ground connection to ensure proper operation and safety.
There are no power switches on the relay. When the power supply is connect-
ed, the relay starts its initialization process and takes about 40 seconds to com-
plete showing the green Relay Functional LED.
Case Grounding You must ground the relay to the station ground using the case-grounding ter-
minal at the back of the relay, for details see Figure 1.3: L-PRO Rear View on
page 1-3.
WARNING!
To ensure safety and proper operation you must connect the relay to
the station ground using the rear grounding terminal on the relay.
Ground the relay even when testing.
Do not rely on the rack mounting screws to provide case grounding.
IRIG-B Time Input

The relay is equipped to handle modulated or unmodulated GPS satellite time
IRIG-B signals. The IRIG-B time signal is connected to the BNC connection
on the back of the relay. When the IRIG-B signal is provided to the relay the
IRIG-B functional LED comes on and the relay clock is referenced to this sig-
nal. No settings are required to differentiate between modulated or unmodulat-
ed signals; this is automatically detected by the relay.
You can enable or disable the IEEE 1344 extension in the terminal mode set-
tings Utilities>Setup>Time, for details see “Utilities” on page 3-14. The en-
abled mode allows the year to be received from the IRIG-B signal. If the
available IRIG-B signal has no year extension, this setting should be disabled.

Communicating with the Relay (IED)

There are different ways you can connect to the relay to access its user interface
and SCADA services:
• Direct serial link: (user interface and SCADA)
• Modem link - external or internal: (user interface only)
• Ethernet network link: (user interface and SCADA)
Direct Serial Link
Port 2 - direct/modem

Line Protection
Target
Service Required
Alarm
Port 1
Port 1 Serial Extension Cable

Relay Port 1 or rear Port 2
to DB-9 female (laptop)
Laptop PC
Figure 2.1: Direct Serial Link
The relay has 3 serial ports that provide direct access to its user interface and
SCADA services.
All of the relay’s serial ports (Ports 1, 2 and 3) are configured as EIA RS-232
Data Communications Equipment (DCE) devices with female DB9 connec-
tors. This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a stan-
dard straight-through male-to-female serial cable, for pin-out, for details see
“Communication Port Details” on page 2-9.
The relay’s user interface is accessed through a standard VT-100 terminal em-
ulation program running on a PC. To create a direct serial link between the re-
lay and your computer, connect the serial cable (provided) between your
computer's serial port and Port 1 on the relay’s front panel. Port 2 on the relay’s
rear panel can also be used for direct serial access, provided the port is not con-
figured for modem use. When connected, run the terminal emulation software
on your computer to establish the communication link, for details see “Using
HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s User Interface” on page 2-5.
The relay’s Modbus and DNP3 SCADA services can be accessed via a direct
serial link to Port 3 on the relay’s rear panel, for details see “Accessing the Re-
lay’s SCADA Services” on page 2-8.

Modem Link -
External
Modem Cable
(as supplied with modem)
Analog
Telephone
Modem Adapter Analog
Line
Port 2 - Direct/Modem Telephone
Telephone Line
L-PRO
Line Protection
Relay Functional
System
Target
Service Required
Alarm
Port 1 External
Modem
Desktop Computer
Modem Adapter
Supplied by ERLPhase
DB-9-Male-Male
Figure 2.2: External Modem Link
Using an external modem, you can also access the relay’s user interface
through a telephone link between the relay and your computer.
Connect the serial port on the external modem to the Port 2 on the relay’s rear
panel. Both devices are configured as RS-232 DCE devices with female con-
nectors, so the cable between the relay and the modem requires a crossover and
a gender change. Alternatively, you can use the ERLPhase modem port adapter
provided with the relay to make Port 2 appear the same as a PC’s serial port. A
standard modem-to-PC serial cable can then be used to connect the modem and
the relay. For pin-out details see “Communication Port Details” on page 2-9.
Connect the modem to an analog telephone line or switch using a standard RJ-
11 connector.
You must appropriately configure the relay’s Port 2 to work with a modem.
Log into the relay through a direct serial link, go to the Utilities>Setup>Ports
screen, and set Port 2 Modem option to Yes. Set the Baud Rate as high as pos-
sible — most modems handle 57,600 bps. The Initialize setting allows you to
set the control codes sent to the modem at the start of each connection session.
The factory defaults are: “M0S0=0&B1” for an external modem and
“M0S0=0” for an internal modem.

Modem Link -
Internal
Analog Analog
Port 5 - RJ-11 modem Telephone Telephone
Line Telephone Line
System
Line Protection
Target
Service Required
Alarm
Port 1
Desktop Computer
Figure 2.3: Internal Modem Link
You can access the relay’s user interface through a telephone link between the
relay and your computer using an optional internal modem. If the modem has
been installed, Port 5 on the rear panel is labelled “INTERNAL MODEM.”
Connect the relay’s Port 5 to an analog telephone line or switch using a stan-
dard RJ-11 connector.
When an internal modem is installed, the relay’s Port 2 is used to interface to
the modem internally. Appropriate Port 2 settings are configured at the factory
when the internal modem is installed. The factory defaults are: “M0S0=0&B1”
for an external modem and “M0S0=0” for an internal modem.
Network Link
PC with TCP/IP
10BaseT
TCP/IP
Network
Port 5 - RJ-45
Network
Line Protection
Target
Service Required
Alarm
Port 1
Figure 2.4: Network Link
An optional Ethernet TCP/IP LAN link lets you access both the relay’s user in-
terface and DNP3 SCADA services simultaneously through the same network
port. If the Ethernet option has been installed, Port 5 on the rear panel will be
labelled “NETWORK.”
The user interface accessed through the LAN is the same as that available
through a direct serial connection or a modem link, but requires the use of a
Telnet client on your PC. The HyperTerminal program, which is included in
Windows XP and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE, provides
Telnet services. To select Telnet, go to HyperTerminal's Properties dialogue
and set the Connect Using field to TCP/IP (Winsock). If this option is not avail-
able in the pick list, you will require a newer version of HyperTerminal (v1.2

or greater). Alternatively, you can use any Telnet program that fully supports
VT-100 terminal emulation and z-modem file transfer.
DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN, for details see
“Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services” on page 2-8.
Connect Port 5 to the Ethernet LAN using an appropriate 10BaseT cable with
an RJ-45 connector. The relay supports 10 Mbit Ethernet, although a dual
speed 10/100 Ethernet hub or switch can be used.
By default, the relay is assigned an IP address of 192.168.1.100. If this address
is not suitable, it may be modified using the relay’s Maintenance Menu, for de-
tails see “Maintenance Menu” on page 2-12.
Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s User Interface

The relay’s user interface lets you change settings, view measured values and
retrieve data from the relay. This section describes how to configure a standard
Windows VT-100 terminal program on your PC for use with the relay.
The computer must be connected to the relay via one of its serial, modem or
Ethernet communication ports. See the preceding Communicating with the Re-
lay section for details on making these connections.
The relay user interface is accessed using a standard VT-100 terminal style
program on your computer, eliminating the need for specialized user interface
software. Any terminal program that fully supports VT-100 emulation and pro-
vides z-modem file transfer services can be used. The HyperTerminal pro-
gram, which is included in some versions of Microsoft Windows and is also
available separately as HyperTerminal PE, is used here as an example.
Configure your terminal program as described in the table below and link it to
the appropriate serial port, modem or TCP/IP socket on your computer.
Terminal Program Setup
Baud rate For a direct serial link, the baud rate must match that of the relay serial
port.
For a modem link, the baud rate refers only to the link between your
computer and its own modem.
Refer to “Setting the Baud Rate” on page 2-7 for further information
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control Hardware or Software.

Hardware flow control is recommended. The relay automatically sup-
ports both on all its serial ports.
Function, arrow Terminal keys

and control keys
Emulation VT100

Terminal Program Setup
Font Use a font that supports line drawing (e.g. Terminal or MS Line Draw).
If the menu appears outlined in odd characters, the font you have
selected is not supporting line drawing characters.
To initiate the connection with the relay, use HyperTerminal’s Call>Connect

function.
When the connection is established, press ENTER in the terminal window to
bring up the following login prompt:
-------- ERLPhase L-PRO 2100 Terminal User Interface login -------
Log in using one of the following usernames:

'view' - read-only access to settings and readings
'change' - read/write access to settings and readings
'service' - full access to all functions (Port 1 access only)
'maintenance' - access to the maintenance menu
'update' - to load a firmware update (Port 1 access only)
Notes:
- Serial and modem connections have a 60 minute inactivity timeout
- Usernames and passwords are case sensitive
login:
Instructions on logging in and running the user interface are given in “Terminal
Mode” on page 3-5.
If you see incorrect characters on a direct serial connection, it may mean there
is a mismatch between the relay’s baud rate and that of the PC.
Ending a User Use the Quit function in the relay’s user menu to end a session. This will close
Interface Session the interface and require the next user to log in to the relay.
The relay automatically ends a session when it detects the disconnecting of a
direct serial cable or a modem hang-up. For other types of connections (e.g. se-
rial switches or Ethernet) you are advised to use the Quit function to ensure the
interface is closed and login protection is activated.

Setting the Baud Rate
The baud rate of the relay's serial ports can be shown on the relay's
front panel display. From the main Date & Time display, press the
Next button.
Direct Serial Link For a direct serial connection, both the relay and your computer must be set to
the same baud rate.
To change the baud rate of a relay serial port:
1 Access the relay's user interface through any of the available ports
2 Log in to the user interface and go to the Utilities>Setup>Ports menu, for
details see “Terminal Mode” on page 3-5.
3 Select the desired baud rate for the appropriate port by toggling through the
options using the Space or Enter keys. Save the new setting with the F2 key.
The message “New communications settings loaded” will appear.
The new baud rate will be used on that port the next time you log in to it.
To change the baud rate on your computer’s serial port:
4 From within HyperTerminal, bring up the Properties dialogue, press the
Configure button and set the baud rate field to the desired value.
5 Save the changes.
Modem Link Unlike a direct serial link, the baud rates for a modem link do not have to be
the same on your computer and on the relay. The modems automatically nego-
tiate an optimal baud rate for their communication.
The baud rate set on the relay only affects the rate at which the relay commu-
nicates with the modem. Similarly, the baud rate set in HyperTerminal only af-
fects the rate at which your computer communicates with its modem. Details
on how to set these respective baud rates are described above, except that you
modify the Port 2 baud rate on the relay and the properties of the modem in Hy-
perTerminal.

Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services

The relay supports DNP3 (Level 2) and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan-
dard feature on all ERLPhase relays. DNP3 is available through a direct serial
link or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols. The Modbus
implementation supports both RTU (binary) or ASCII modes and is available
through a direct serial link.
The relay’s Port 3 is dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 serial protocols.
Port 3 uses standard RS-232 signalling. An external RS-232<->RS-485 con-
verter can also be used to connect to an RS-485 network.
For details on connecting to serial Port 3 see “Communicating with the Relay
(IED)” on page 2-2 and “Communication Port Details” on page 2-9.
The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the optional Ethernet LAN. Both
DNP over TCP and DNP over UDP are supported. For details on connecting
to the Ethernet LAN see “Network Link” on page 2-4.
Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in
the Appendices, for details see “Modbus RTU Communication Protocol”
in Appendix E and “DNP3 Device Profile” in Appendix F.
Protocol Selection To select the desired SCADA protocol, open the setting file. Set the protocol
and set the corresponding parameters.
The DNP3 LAN/WAN - TCP and UDP options are only available if the
unit has an optional Ethernet LAN port installed.
Communication Port 3’s communication parameters are set using the Utilities>Setup>Ports
Parameters menu in relay’s user interface. Both the baud rate and the parity bit can be con-
figured. The number of data bits and stop bits are determined automatically by
the selected SCADA protocol. Modbus ASCII uses 7 data bits. Modbus RTU
and DNP Serial use 8 data bits. All protocols use 1 stop bit except in the case
where either Modbus protocol is used with no parity; this uses 2 stop bits, as
defined in the Modbus standard.
Diagnostics Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu-
nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing. The utilities
can be access through the Maintenance user interface, for details see “Mainte-
nance Menu” on page 2-12.

Communication Port Details
Port Location Function
1 Front Panel RS-232 Data Communication Equipment (DCE) female DB9.

Used for user interface access via a direct serial connection.
Default Setting: 38,400 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.
2 Rear Panel RS-232 DCE female DB9.

Used for:
• User interface access via a direct serial connection.
• User interface access via an external modem. The optional
ERLPhase Modem Adapter converts this port to a Data Termi-
nal Equipment (DTE) to simplify connection to an external
modem.
Port 2 is disabled if the relay is equipped with an internal modem
(see Port 5).
3 Rear Panel RS-232 DCE female DB9.

Used for SCADA communication.
4 Rear Panel Not used
5 Rear Panel RJ-11/RJ-45 receptacle.

When equipped with optional internal modem:
• Used for user interface access via modem.
When equipped with optional internal Ethernet card:
• User interface access.
• DNP SCADA access.
Default Ethernet IP address: 192.168.1.100.

Direction Pin # on the

Signal Name
PC<-> Relay Relay Port
DCD  1
RxD  2
TxD  3
DTR  4
Common 5
DSR  6
RTS  7
CTS  8
No connection 9
Notes:
• Relay is DCE, PC is DTE
• Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay
Male DB-9 Cable End for Female DB-9 Cable End for
Relay Port Computer Port
Pin # on Cable Pin # on Cable
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

Direction Pin # on the

Signal Name
Modem <-> Relay Modem Adapter
DCD  1
RxD  2
TxD  3
DTR  4
Common 5
DSR  6
RTS  7
CTS  8
No connection 9
Notes:
• Relay (with modem adapter) is DTE, modem is DCE
• Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay

Maintenance Menu
The relay has a Maintenance Menu that can be accessed by connection through
a VT-100 terminal emulator (such as the HyperTerminal program). Using ei-
ther direct serial or modem connection:
1 Use the terminal program to connect to the serial port, either through direct
serial link or modem.
2 Select Enter, the relay responds with a login prompt.
Figure 2.5: Login Prompt
3 Login as “maintenance” in lower case.

4 Relay responds with “password” prompt.
Figure 2.6: Maintenance Password Prompt
5 Enter password.
6 A menu appears as below:

Figure 2.7: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance Menu
Commands
Please enter a command:1-11
1 Modify IP Address, subnet mask and default gateway (if applicable).
2 View system diagnostics.
3 Retrieve system diagnostics.
4 Restore all default settings, including calibration.
5 Restore only default configuration settings (channel definitions, device settings).
6 Restore only default system setup (ports, time settings).
7 Force hardware reset.
8 Network utilities (if applicable).
9 Monitor SCADA.
10 Enable/disable internal modem (if one exists)
11 Exit.
Commands 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 10 are Port 1 access only.

Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP address when equipped with an

optional internal 10BaseT Ethernet card.
View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log.
Retrieve system diagnostics Automatically packages up the internal status log plus set-
ting and setup information and downloads it in compressed
form to your computer. This file can then be sent to our cus-
tomer support to help diagnose a problem.
Restore settings Use this menu to force the system back to default values, if
you suspect a problem due to the unit’s settings, calibration
and/or setup parameters.
Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset. Note that the communi-
cation link is immediately lost and cannot be re-established
until the unit completes its start-up.
Network utilities Enters network utilities sub-menu.
Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data.
Enable/disable Modem Enables or disables the internal modem.
Network Utilities
Menu Commands *
Please enter a command:1-5
1 View protocol statistics
2 View active socket states
3 View routing tables
4 Ping
5 Exit network utilities
View protocol statistics View IP, TCP and UDP statistics
View active socket states View current states of active sockets
View routing tables View routing tables
Ping Check network connection to given point
Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance Menu
Commands
* Accessible when equipped with internal Ethernet card

Firmware Update
The relay has an update login that can be accessed by a connection through a
VT100 terminal emulator (such as HyperTerminal). This login is available
only from Port 1.
1 Use the terminal program to connect to Port 1.
2 Select Enter, the terminal responds with a login prompt (Figure 2.8:
Firmware Update Password Prompt ).
3 Login as “update” in lower case.
4 Relay responds with “password” prompt.
login: update
Last login Mon Nov 16 19:36:28 2015 on //1/dev/ser1
Mon Nov 16 23:23:11 2015
Password:-
Figure 2.8: Firmware Update Password Prompt
5 Enter password.
The firmware update is used to update the relay’s software with maintenance
or enhancement releases. Please see the L-PRO Firmware Update Procedure
documentation that comes with the firmware update for instructions on how to
update the firmware.

3 Using the IED (Getting Started)
L-PRO Line Protection Relay

Line Protection
Target
Service Required
Alarm
Port 1
Offline Mode - Settings Software
Online Mode - Terminal Mode
Start-up Sequence
The following initialization sequence takes place:
Test Mode, red LED on 2 seconds after power applied

Relay Functional, green LED on 5 seconds after power applied
Front Display, on 30 seconds after power applied
Test Mode, red LED off 40 seconds after power applied
When the relay is powered up, the normal sequence of LED operation is Test
Mode followed by Relay Functional and IRIG-B Functional (if available), dis-
play on, then Test Mode off. The entire sequence takes about 40 seconds.
Ways to interface with the relay:
• Front panel display
• Terminal Mode
• Offliner Settings software

Front Panel Display
View or change settings using Terminal Mode or loading a setting file

from Offliner Setting.
The front panel display is the fastest and easiest way of getting information
from the relay.
Display LED Lights
Relay Functional
2002 MAY15 13:22:07 Target IRIG-B Functional

Service Required
Date & View View Previous Next Clear Test Mode
Alarm
Push Buttons
Figure 3.1: Front Panel Display
The display, the 6 LED lights and the 6 push buttons provide selective infor-
mation about the relay.
LED Lights
Relay Indicates when the relay is functional. When the Relay Functional
Functional green LED goes on, the rear Relay Inoperative contact changes to
open and the protective functions become functional.
IRIG-B Functional Indicates the presence of a valid IRIG-B time signal.
Service Required Indicates the relay needs service. This LED can be the same state as
the Relay Functional LED or can be of the opposite state depending on
the nature of the problem.
The following items bring up this LED:
• DSP failure - protection difficulties within the relay.
• Communication failure within the relay.
• Internal relay problems.
Test Mode Occurs when the relay output contacts are intentionally blocked.
Possible reasons are:
• Relay initialization on start-up
• User interface processor has reset and is being tested.
You cannot communicate with the relay through the ports until the front
display becomes active and the Test Mode LED goes out. Normally,
the red Target LED remains off after this start-up unless the relay had
unviewed target messages.
Output contacts are controlled from the Utilities menu.

Alarm Occurs when an enabled relay function picks up.

The red Alarm LED should be off if there are no inputs to the relay. If
the Alarm LED is on, check the event log messages on the front dis-
play by pressing the View Logs button.
Target Indicates that a fault has taken place.

An event message with date and time is presented in the display.
Push Buttons
Date&Time Pressing the Date&Time button displays the date and time stored on
the relay.
If the time is incorrect, use the Utilities>Setup>Time function in the
Terminal Mode user interface to set it manually, or connect an IRIG-B
signal source to the IRIG-B port at the back of the relay to set it auto-
matically. The year may need to be set manually if it is not provided as
part of the IRIG-B signal
View Readings Pressing the View Readings button obtains metering information about
the transmission line, for details see “Display” on page 3-4.
View Logs Pressing the View Logs button displays the target information if a relay
operation has occurred, for details see “Display” on page 3-4.
Previous/Next Scroll through the menu by pressing Previous and Next. When the
Date & Time is displayed, pressing either of these buttons will
display the current Port 1 and Port 2 baud rates.
Clear Target When a fault takes place, the red target light appears. You can select a
setting option to reset the target light after a short time delay. Use the
Clear Target button to view all target information. If many faults have
been stored, you may need to push this button several times. Clearing
the target light does not clear the target information from the relay log.
The relay holds all target messages during a power supply shutdown
and restart. Pressing the Clear Target push button displays any targets
not previously viewed on the front display and clears the Target LED
after the last target has been viewed.

Display
2000 JUL 07 13:22:07 Target
Date & View View Previous Next Clear

Time Reading Logs Target
View Readings
Pri V 0.0 KV ph–ph

I 0.0 A line
View Logs
2000Jun28 19:34:31.823
Line 5 Device 51 Trip
Previous/Next
Active Setting Group: 1

<Group Name>
Port 1: 38400bps N,8,1

Port 2: 9600bps N,8,1
Figure 3.2: Display examples
Pressing Previous and Next navigates through the Active Setting Group.
L-PRO Front Panel Display Messages
PRI V, I, P, Q
Va, Ia magnitude and angle
Vb, Ib magnitude and angle
Vc, Ic magnitude and angle
Frequency
Fault location, trip date and time and all functions.

Terminal Mode
1 Establish terminal mode connection, for details “Using HyperTerminal to
Access the Relay’s User Interface” on page 2-5.
2 Login as one of view, change, service or secadmin (lower case). These 4
login names provide differing levels of permission.
3 When connection is established and the terminal mode program appears on
your screen, the following prompt should appear. If it doesn’t appear, press
Enter.
4 If login is successful, the Main Menu appear as follows:

- for view, change or service login
view, change or service

(depends on how you log in)
- for secadmin login

5 If login is unsuccessful, the Status Message appear as follows:
Unit allows 7 unsuccessful login attempts before locking out the Access Level
for 5 minutes. Any attempts to login into locked out Access Level will fail. Ac-
cess lockout and lockout period are Access Level specific, i.e. if an Access
Level is locked out, the other Access Levels remain unaffected.
If the box around the menu does not appear as above, change the
font in your terminal program to one that supports line draw charac-
ters, e.g. terminal fonts.
If there are incorrect characters in the display, improper line feeds or

unerased portions, the baud rate is too high for the quality of the com-
munication link. Use the Utilities>Setup>Ports menu to reduce the re-
lay’s baud rate. The new rate is in effect at the next connection.
The relay supports 4 user access levels that control what relay functions
are available to user. The current access level is always shown in the
centre of the Main Menu heading.
To change the Access Level either login again using the desired access
level as your login name. To change between view, change and service
Access Level you can also use the Main Menu>Access menu.
Level/
Access Level Login Name Authorized Functions
Function
view view lowest View settings, online readings and logs. List
and retrieve records. At this level you cannot
affect the operation of the controller.
change change middle Do all of the above, plus change the settings
and delete records.
service service highest Do all of the above 2 categories, plus cali-

brate the analog inputs, manually control out-
put auxiliary relays and modify passwords.
secadmin secadmin security Change passwords.

View/change Syslog configuration.

maintenance maintenance mainte- Configure IP address, subnet mask, default

nance gateway IP address.
Restore default configuration/settings/calibra-
tion.
Enable/disable modem.
View/retrieve system diagnostics.
update update update Firmware update
Service access is only available through the local, front port connec-
tion (Port 1).
You can configure change access so that it is only allowed from Port
1.
Login Passwords Individual passwords for all Access Levels are available to prevent or limit ac-
cess to the IED. Passwords are mandatory. Units arrive from the factory with
default passwords installed. Default passwords are as follows.
Access Level/Login Name Default Password
view view
change change
service service
secadmin secadmin
maintenance maintenance
update update
The following rules are applied, when firmware is upgraded to a ver-

sion with secadmin login for the first time
- the current password is preserved, if Access Level has a password

assigned to it;
- a default password is assigned to an Access Level, if Access Level

does not have a password assigned to/associated with it.
Terminal Mode Use the right and left arrow keys and the Enter key to move around in the ter-
Menus minal mode screen. The mouse does not work in VT100 terminal mode. Items
from the menu are selected by moving the highlight to the desired item and ac-

tivating it using the Enter key. As a short-cut, use the first letter of the menu
item to access it directly.
Key Function
<F2> Accept or Freeze or Execute
<F3> Quit or Exit
<F4> Copy Group
<Esc> Back to previous menu level
The menu tree consists of a series of sub-menus, for details see Figure 3.3: Ter-
minal Mode Menus for view, change and service login on page 3-9.
The Enter key allows you to toggle through a list of selections, i.e. enabled/dis-
abled. The Enter key toggles forward through the list, while the space bar
moves backward through the list. In this manner you do not have to scroll
through the entire list to get back to a previous selection, you can use the space
bar.
For certain lists a pick box appears when there is a long list of selections to
chose from, for example, ProLogic inputs. You can scroll though these boxes
with the arrow keys or the Enter key. Use the F2 key to make a selection or F3
to leave.

Id Settings Metering Records Event Log Utilities Access Quit
D02333R05.00
Active Analog List Setup Setup VIEW
Group Time Access
External Fault Maintenance Ports
Inputs Recording SCADA CHANGE
Settings Access
External Inputs
Diagnostics
Load Output Swing Restriction
from Contacts Recording
Offliner Maintenance
Calibrate
Password
Logic Event Calibrate
Retrieve Recording Outputs
Main VA, VB, VC
to Control Virtual
Analog Inputs Main IA, IB, IC,
Offliner Inputs
Line Quantities Aux IA, IB, IC,
Erase
IA3, IB3, IC3
Logic
Diagnostics Modbus IA4, IB4, IC4,
Protection.. Logic 1
L-PRO Settings Transfer Diagnostics Status Message Aux VA, VB, VC
ProLogic Logic 2
Identification.. Modbus.. Modbus Diagnostic
Setting Group Output Contacts
L-PRO System Parameters Modbus Log
Virtual Inputs Toggle1-14 (21)
Line Parameters (common)
Setting Group 1 Identification Input Name
Setting Group 2 Relay 21 Latch OFF
Setting Group 3 Comments 21P Latch ON
Setting Group 4 Protection Functions 21N
Analog Input Names Pulse ON
Setting Group 5 21..
External Input Names
68 Sync Check & 79
L-PRO User Manual 2100

Setting Group 6 Output Contact Names Erase
Setting Group 7 Dead Line Pickup 252759 Sync Check Records
Setting Group Names
Setting Group 8 Weak Infeed 79 Event Log
Virtual Input Names
Recording.. Sync Check & 79..
59 50/51/67
Setting Group 1–8 27 50/51/67
Line Parameters 60 50N/51N/67
Scheme Selector 81.. 4650/4651/67
Breaker Status 50LS
Protection Functions.. 50BF
Z Circle Trigger 50/51/67.. Output Matrix #1 (21, 50/51, 50N/51N, Trip;68 Out,Z Circ Trig)
ProLogic.. Output Matrix #2 (46/50/51, DLP Trip; 21, 46/51, 51, 60 Alarm)
Group Logic.. ProLogic
Output Matrix #3 (Scheme, 252759SyncCh, 27, 50LS, 59, 68Alarm, 79)
Output Matrix.. ProLogic 1 – 12
Output Matrix #4 (50BF, 81 Trip)
Figure 3.3: Terminal Mode Menus for view, change and service login
Group Logic Output Matrix #5 (External Inputs)
Group Logic 1 – 16 Output Matrix #6 (ProLogic)
Output Matrix #7 (Virtual Inputs 1 - 15)
Output Matrix #8 (Virtual Inputs 16 - 30)
3-9
ID Passwords Syslog Quit
Syslog Configuration
Mode : Disabled
IP Adress : 10.0.0.0
Port : 514
Host Name : Unit IP Address
Password Update Update password for View level

View Enter new password: ________
Change
Service
Secadmin
Maintenance
Update
Figure 3.4: Terminal Mode Menus for secadmin Login
The Main Menu display is
ID Settings Metering Records Event Log Utilities Access Quit
ID Provides the device serial number, hardware revision, software version, re-
quired settings version, nominal system values and external input board rating.
There are no user settings here.

Settings Submenus: Active Group, Settings, Load from Offliner, Retrieve to Offliner
Allows input of all the setting information for the relay. Includes all the sub-
menus to change relay settings related to protection functions, when settings
are changed they are not saved until you confirm the changes—Save and Load
Setting Changes Now? [y/n].
Settings
Settings includes all the submenus pertaining to protection functions used to
create a relay setting. When these settings are made or changed, you can load
them into the relay allowing input of all settings information for the relay.
Settings submenus: Identification, L-PRO System Parameters, Line Parame-
ters (common), Setting Group 1 to 8, Recording.
Identification..
Relay Serial Number, Software Version, Relay ID, Line Name, Station
Name, Station Number and Location.
Comments Enter any appropriate comment.
Analog Input Names Name inputs, Main VA, VB, VC, Main IA, IB, IC, Aux IA, IB, IC, IA3,
IB3, IC3, IA4, IB4, IC4, Aux VA
External Inputs Name external inputs 1 to 9.

Names
Output Contact Name auxiliary relay output contacts 1 to 14.

Names
Setting Group Names Name setting groups 1 to 8
Virtual Input Names Name virtual inputs 1 to 30
The following characters are not allowed in the above setting parameters: “ ”,
“\”, “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “|”, “"“, “<“, and “>”.
Load From Offliner

You can download the settings file into the relay using the terminal mode
menu.
1 On the Window’s desktop, double-click L-PRO Offliner Settings icon. The
initial Offliner Settings screen appears.
2 Enter the required settings.
3 Save the settings to a file on your PC.
4 Start the Terminal Mode of L-PRO, login as change or service, then access
the Settings menu and activate Load from Offliner function.
5 Reply Yes to the “Ready to load remote setting.” prompt.
6 In your terminal program, initiate transfer of the setting file created in step
2 above. (For example, with HyperTerminal, you would select Transfer,
then Send File. Browse to find the file, then select Open and finally, Send.
7 When the file has been transferred, verified and loaded, a message “New
settings loaded and secure” is displayed.

A “serial number discrepancy” message may appear. This is to en-

sure that you are aware of the exact relay to which the settings are
being loaded. If this happens, check the relay serial number using
the terminal mode ID menu item. Type this serial number into the
L-PRO Serial No. box in the Identification tab display area of Offlin-
er Settings. Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number
check box to bypass serial number supervision.
Retrieve To Offliner
To transfer the relay’s current settings to the PC do the following:
1 Start L-PRO in Terminal Mode and login as view, change or service.
2 Navigate to Settings>Retrieve To Offliner.
3 Select Enter.
4 The relay asks you if you wish to continue. Select Y for yes.
5 The file is sent to the directory defined by the HyperTerminal menu Trans-
fer>Receive File.
When using HyperTerminal if “Use receiving protocol:” is set to “Z

modem with Crash Recovery”, file transfers are skipped by Hyper-
Terminal if the record already exists in the downloads folder.
When using HyperTerminal use Z-modem (no crash recovery), files

are received and auto-incremented.
Metering Submenus: Analog, External Inputs, Output Contacts, Logic.

For a detailed description see “Metering Data” on page 3-16
Analog
Analog Inputs Provide secondary values of the ac analog voltages and currents.
Line Quantities Provide primary voltage kV phase–phase of each line.
External Inputs Displays the current state of the External Inputs.
Output Contacts Displays the current state of the Output Contacts.
Logic
Protection Protection Functions.
ProLogic Provides the present status of the internal logic states. When a logic
level becomes active, its state changes from low to high.
Setting Group Displays current active Setting Group and Group Logic.
Virtual Inputs Provide the present status of the virtual input logic states. When a
logic level becomes active, its state changes from low to high.

Records Submenus - List, Fault Recording, Swing Recording, Event Recording.

Contains the means for initiating and retrieving recordings.
List Lists all records.
Fault Recording Creates fault records.
Swing Recording Creates swing records.
Event Recording Creates event records.
Retrieve Records from the Relay

To retrieve records from the relay do the following:
2 Navigate to Records>List and press Enter; a records list appears.
3 Select Records using the space bar and select R. (You can also press Enter
to retrieve a record directly.) The record will be saved in the directory spec-
ified by the terminal emulation program.
When using HyperTerminal if “Use receiving protocol:” is set to “Z

modem with Crash Recovery”, file transfers are skipped by Hyper-
Terminal if the record already exists in the downloads folder.
When using HyperTerminal use Z-modem (no crash recovery), files

are received and auto-incremented.
Delete Records from the Relay

To delete records from the relay do the following:
2 Navigate to Records>List and press Enter.
3 Select the records for deletion with the space bar and select D. The selected
records will be deleted.
Event Log The event log lists events stored in the relay. A complete list of the types of
events logged is available, for details see “Event Messages” in Appendix D.
For protection logic elements the event is logged only when the element chang-
es from Low to High. For External Inputs, Virtual Inputs and Output Contacts,
all changes of state are logged (Low to High, High to Low, Open to Closed,
Closed to Open).
If an event triggered a record, then an (R) is displayed by the event.

Utilities Sub-menus: Setup, Maintenance, Diagnostics.
Setup
Time - set manual time, IRIG-B skew control. Requires change or

service access level.
Ports - change Baud rates on communication ports. Requires

change or service access level.
SCADA - select which SCADA protocol (Modbus or DNP v3.0) to

run on the SCADA port. Configure parameters for the selected pro-
tocol such as address or timeout. Requires change or service
access level.
External Inputs - Set the number of samples that an external input

must be high in order for the external input to change, for details see
“IED Specifications” in Appendix A.
Maintenance
Calibrate - calibrate all 18 analog inputs. Requires service access

level.
Outputs - close and open output contacts independent of the associ-

ated relay functions. Requires service access level.
Control Virtual Inputs - set, reset and pulse virtual inputs. Pulse
width is 1 second. Latched virtual inputs reset after pulse command
has executed. Requires change or service access level.
Erase - use submenus Records and Event Logs to erase these

records from the relay memory. Requires change or service access
level.
Diagnostics
Transfer Diagnostics - transfers relay diagnostic file to the PC. The

diagnostic file can be sent to us for analysis.
Modbus - allows Modbus Communications to enter its Diagnostic

Mode. Follow directions on the screen. Programming done using the
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. G
published by Modicon, Inc., dated November 1994. For details see
“Modbus RTU Communication Protocol” in Appendix E.

Access Submenus: “view” Access, “change” Access, Password. Provides the ability
view Changes the access level to view. Allows you read-only access to
relay information.
change Changes the access level to change. Allows you to modify settings
and delete records.
Restriction Allows you to limit change access to Port 1 only or cancel limitation.
Passwords Allows you to read and change passwords. Requires service access
level.
Passwords Submenu: Password Update
Password Update Password Update includes the submenus for all Access Levels password up-
dates.
View Password update for view login
Change Password update for change login
Service Password update for service login
Secadmin Password update for secadmin login
Maintenance Password update for maintenance login
Update Password update for update login
Syslog Submenu: Syslog Configuration

Syslog Configuration submenu allows configuration of Syslog server commu-
nication parameters as well as selection of “Host Name” field value in the unit
Syslog message (see section 8 “Cyber Security”).
Modes of Syslog server operation are defined in the table below.
Mode Description
Disabled Communication with Syslog server is disabled
UDP UDP protocol is used for communication with Syslog server
“IP Address” parameter defines Syslog server IP Address.

“Port” parameter defines Syslog server IP port for receiving Syslog messages.
“Host Name” parameter values are as follows.

Host Name Description
Unit IP Address Unit IP Address is used for Syslog message “Host Name” field
Unit Serial Number Unit Serial Number is used for Syslog message “Host Name” field
Unit ID Unit ID is used for Syslog message “Host Name” field
Quit Selecting this option ends serial port communication with the relay.
Metering Data
Front Panel The quantities provided on the front panel display are the L-L voltage line cur-
Metering rents, primary W, VARS, line-to-neutral quantities for the individual phases
and frequency.
TUI Metering The TUI provides the following metering quantities.
Analog
Analog Inputs – displays the magnitude and phase relationship of all the analog
inputs.
Line Quantities – displays the primary line-to-line voltage, line current, MW,
MVARS and system frequency.
External Inputs
Displays the status of all External Inputs.
Output Contacts
Displays the status of all Output Contacts.
Logic
Protection – displays the status of all internal logic.
ProLogic – displays the status of all ProLogic.
Group Logic – displays the status of all Group Logic and Active Setting Group.
Virtual Inputs – displays the status of all Virtual Inputs.
I/O
I/O metering shows the status of all external inputs and output contacts.

4 Protection Functions and Specifications
Protection and Recording Functions
This section describes the equations and algorithms of the L-PRO Relay pro-
tection functions. All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when
their pickup level is exceeded.
The following exceptions are: 27 Auxiliary, 27 Main, 59 Auxiliary, 59 Main,
25/27/59 Sync Check, 50LS Main, 50LS Auxiliary, 50BF Main, 50BF Auxil-
iary, 81 Frequency and ProLogic elements.
21P Phase/21N L-PRO has 4 zones of phase and 4 zones of ground distance protection ele-
Ground Distance ments. The 4 zones in the ground distance element (21N) can be set to either a
Mho
Mho shape or quadrilateral shape, for details see “21N Ground Distance Quad-
rilateral” on page 4-5.
Zones 3 and 4 are set in both the forward and reverse direction as required. Set
all the distance functions in secondary ohms. The available range of impedance
settings is based on the hardware capabilities of the relay and the nominal cur-
rent specified when ordered. The range is 0.05 to 66.00 ohms for a 5A nominal
relay, and 0.25 to 330.00 ohms for a 1A nominal relay
21-4
21-3
21-2
Line Z1
Characteristic Angle
21-1
Line Angle
R
Figure 4.1: Phase and Ground Mho
The shape of the phase and ground distance relays is adjustable. For the circu-
lar Mho characteristic, the characteristic angle is 90 degrees. Determine this
angle by drawing 2 lines from any point on the impedance locus to the diameter
of the characteristic. Produce a tomato-shaped characteristic by selecting an
angle less than 90 degrees or a lens-shaped characteristic with angles greater
than 90 degrees.
Line angle Line angle Line angle
Circle (90°) Tomato (<90°) Lens (>90°)

Figure 4.2: Mho Characteristic Shapes
The shape of the Mho characteristic means that significant extensions are made
to the relay characteristics in the R region of the R-X plane for ground faults.
You can restrict the reach in the R region for the phase distance relays where
load encroachment is an issue. The shaped Mho characteristic provides the best
fit for the application keeping the number of relay settings at a minimum and
provides the benefits associated with the Mho characteristic.
The Mho characteristic used by the relay is developed by the classical ap-
proach using the measurement of the angle between 2 vectors.
These vectors are defined as:
A = I  Z set – V
B = V ref
where V is the actual line voltage for ground distance relays or the actual line
to line voltage for the phase distance relay.
I is defined as:
I phase + K o  3I 0
for ground distance relays or the line to line current for phase distance relays.
Zset is the setting reach and Vref is a positive sequence memory voltage stored
within the relay.
Vref is the polarizing quantity for the mho elements, and is more completely de-
scribed in “Relay Method of Memory Polarization” on page 4-5.
To make the reach of the ground distance relay relate to the line positive se-
quence impedance the classical Ko factor is used.
This factor is defined as:
Z0 – Z1
K 0 = -----------------
3Z 1
The L-PRO includes a directional element to supervise the phase (21P) and
ground (21N) mho elements, for Zone 1 (21P1, 21N1) and Zone 2 (21P2,
21N2) only. The directional element prevents mis-operation of the mho ele-
ments for reverse faults, faults at the bus, and phase-phase faults during high
load conditions. The directional element does not supervise Zone 3 and Zone
4 elements due to the offset reach capabilities of these zones. The directional
element is desribed in “Directional Element” on page 4-7.

21 P
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Enable/disable Enable/disable Enable/disable Enable/disable
Forward Reach (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)
0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.0 (1 A)
Reverse Reach (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)

0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A)
Mho Characteristic Angle (degrees) 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0
Pickup Delay (seconds) 0.00 to 0.20 0.00 to 2.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
Id Supervision (amps secondary) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A)
0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A)
Line Angle (degrees) 45 to 89

Setting is made in Parameters. (Positive Sequence Angle.)
Load Impedance (ohms)
R (ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0
X (ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0

21 N
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Characteristic Type Mho/Quad Mho/Quad Mho/Quad Mho/Quad
Forward Reach (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)
(Mho characteristic) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.0 (1 A)
Forward Reach (ohms) x to 66.00 (5 A) x to 66.00 (5 A) x to 66.00 (5 A) x to 66.00 (5 A)

(Quad characteristic) x to 330.00 (1 A) x to 330.00 (1 A) x to 330.00 (1 A) x to 330.0 (1 A)
Reverse Reach (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)

(Mho characteristic) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A)
Reverse Reach (ohms) x to 66.00 (5 A) x to 66.00 (5 A)

(Quad characteristic) x to 330.00 (1 A) x to 330.00 (1 A)
Left Reach (R1) (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)
(Quad only) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A)
Right Reach (R2) (ohms) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A) 0.05 to 66.00 (5 A)
(Quad only) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A) 0.25 to 330.00 (1 A)
Mho Characteristic Angle (degrees) 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0
Pickup Delay (seconds) 0.00 to 0.20 0.00 to 2.00 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 to 5.00
Id Supervision (amps secondary) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A)
0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.00 (1 A)
3IO Supervision (amps secondary) 0.2 to 50.0 (5 A) 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0
0.04 to 10.0 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.0 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.0 (1 A) 0.04 to 10.0 (1 A)
Line Angle (degrees) 45 to 89

Setting is made in Parameters. (Positive Sequence Angle.)
Load Impedance (ohms)
R (ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0
X (ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0
x = R1  cos  LineAngle 

21N Ground The L-PRO device 21N contains 4 zones of ground distance elements; all 4
Distance zones of 21N can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type, note that only one
Quadrilateral
type can be used at a time. The 21N can contain a mixture of Mho and quad
shapes, for example the 21N1 and 21N2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and
the 21N3 and 21N4 could be set to a quadrilateral characteristic.
L-PRO Quadrilateral Characteristics

jx
Zone 3
Zone 2
Line Z
Zone 1
Line Z Forward
Angle
R
Directional Element
Reverse
Zone 4
Figure 4.3: Ground Quadrilateral
The quadrilateral shape is parallel to the positive sequence line angle setting.
The user-defined Mho Characteristic Angle is not selectable when you have
defined a quadrilateral characteristic for that particular zone. All other setting
are selectable and user-definable
Relay Method of The 21P and 21N mho elements use positive-sequence voltage, derived from a
Memory Polarization memory voltage, as the polarizing quantity. Sufficient positive-sequence volt-
age should be available during all fault events. However, during certain fault
events, especially three-phase bolted faults near the line VT location, the pos-
itive-sequence voltage may be insufficient for correct operation. To ensure ad-
equate positive-sequence voltage exists for all fault conditions, the L-PRO uses
a ring filter, implemented in software, to provide memory voltage as the source
for the positive-sequence voltage. This memory voltage lasts for approximate-
ly 150 cycles, even if all voltage inputs from the line VTs go to zero. A practi-
cal effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the mho characteristic by
the source impedance. This expansion of the characteristic ensures correct op-
eration for zero voltage faults at the relay location, and for forward capacitive
faults

.
X
No Memory
Voltage
Line Z
Full
Memory
Voltage
R
Z
rce
Sou
Figure 4.4: Effect of Using Memorized Voltage
Ring Filter The voltage memory in the L-PRO uses a ring filter implemented in software.
The ring filter is a high-Q bandpass filter, with the frequency response centered
on the nominal system frequency. The effect of the ring filter is to retain some
voltage information for approximately 150 cycles, even if the measured system
voltage is severely depressed by a fault.
VA Ring Filter
Sequence
VB Ring Filter Component Vpos_mem
Filter
VC Ring Filter Vpos_mem
correct? Vpolarizing
Sequence
Component Vpos
Filter
Figure 4.5: Polarizing Voltage
Fault
Ring Filter
Memory Voltage
Figure 4.6: Effect of the Ring Filter

The ring filter is designed to adjust the center of the frequency response to ac-
count for small variations of the power system frequency. When the measured
voltage drops below 0.5 Vsec, the ring filter explicitly uses the nominal system
frequency as the center point of the bandpass filter. During this condition, or
when the system frequency varies widely or rapidly, as during out-of-step con-
ditions, the ring filter could provide an incorrect output. During these condi-
tions, the 21P and 21N mho elements use the positive-sequence voltage
derived from the system voltage directly from the line VTs until the voltage
output of the ring filter is correct. If the measured positive sequence voltage is
below 1 Vsec, then the mho elements use the positive sequence voltage derived
from the memory voltage.
Directional Element The L-PRO includes a directional element that directly supervises the Zone 1
and Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements, the 50/51/67, 50N/51N/67N,
46-50/51/67 overcurrent elements, and the 50N/67F and 50N/67R elements in
the Communications Aided Tripping schemes. The directional element consid-
ers negative-sequence impedance, zero-sequence impedance, or positive-se-
quence impedance, depending on relay settings and system conditions at the
time of the fault. The element declares a forward fault when the impedance de-
termined by the directional element is within 90° of the line impedance.
jX
Forward
Line Impedance
90.0 °
Line Z Angle
R
Reverse
Figure 4.7: Fault Direction
The directional element in the L-PRO is always enabled. The directional ele-
ment actually consists of three separate internal elements: a negative-sequence
element, a zero-sequence element, and a positive-sequence element. The neg-
ative-sequence and zero-sequence elements use directly measured currents and
voltages. The positive-sequence element uses directly measured current, and a
memory voltage from the ring filter. The sensitivity for the negative- and zero-
sequence elements may be set by the user, to correctly account for load condi-
tions and system configuration. Both of these elements may be disabled as
well. The positive-sequence element is always active.

Y
3P Fault
N Minimum Sensitivity
Threshold
Z2 Y V2 Y Y
ON I2 Forward
N N
Y Y Y Directional
Z0 3V0 Forward
ON 3I0 Element
Asserted
N N
Y Y
V1 (mem) Forward
I1
Directional
Element
Valid
Figure 4.8: Directional Element Logic
For three-phase faults, the directional element will only use the positive-se-
quence element. For all other faults, the directional element will consider, in
order, the negative-sequence calculation, the zero-sequence calculation, and
the positive-sequence calculation. The directional element will only move
from one calculation to the next calculation if insufficient sequence voltages
and currents exist to make a valid calculation.
The negative-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
negative-sequence impedance, and the positive-sequence line impedance angle
entered in settings. To perform this calculation, the default minimum amount
of negative-sequence voltage required is 0.5 Vsec, and the default minimum
amount of negative-sequence current required is 0.2 Asec.
The zero-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
zero-sequence impedance the zero-sequence line impedance angle entered in
settings. To perform this calculation, the default minimum amount of zero-se-
quence voltage (3V0) required is 1.0 Vsec, and the default minimum amount
of zero-sequence current (3I0) required is 0.2 Asec.
The positive-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
positive-sequence impedance (based on measured current, and the memory
voltage output of the ring filter) and the positive-sequence line impedance an-
gle entered in settings. To perform the positive-sequence impedance calcula-
tion, the directly measured positive-sequence current must exceed 0.2 Asec,
and the memorized positive-sequence voltage must exceed 2 Vsec.

There may be some rare circumstances where there may not be sufficient volt-
age or current, using the negative, zero, and positive sequence components, for
the directional element to make a valid directional decision. The most likely
circumstance where this may occur is a three-phase bolted fault near the line
VTs, that isn't cleared in an appropriate amount of time. It takes approximately
30 cycles, after the measured three-phase system voltage drops to 0, for the
ring filter voltage to decay such the Vpos_mem is less than 2 Vsec. For this cir-
cumstance, or for any other fault case where there are insufficient sequence
component quantities for any of the directional calculations to operate, the di-
rection is set to "forward". Setting the directional element to forward explicitly
sets the direction to forward for the distance elements, and for the 50N/67N-F
and 50N/67N-R elements in the communications aided tripping schemes (ef-
fectively blocking the 50N/67N-R element), and allows all other directionally
controlled elements to operate non-directionally.
Directional Element The output of the directional element asserts when the direction is determined
Outputs to be "forward". This output is uses internally by protection functions directly
supervised by the element, and is also available as the "Directional Element"
indication in ProLogic equations. The directional element also provides the
"Directional Valid" output for use in ProLogic equations. This output asserts
when any one of the active sequence impedance calculations has sufficient in-
put quantities to make a valid direction determination, regardless of the actual
direction. The "Directional Valid" output will always be asserted, except in the
rare case where system voltage has gone to 0 for more than 30 cycles, as pre-
viously described. The 2 outputs can be combined in a ProLogic equation to e
a secure reverse directional output from the L-PRO, for example.
Directional Element
Reverse Fault
Directional Valid
Figure 4.9: Directional Element
Settings The default setting of the directional element in the L-PRO should be correct
for most applications. The default settings enable both the negative-sequence
and zero-sequence calculations, with the minimum sensitivities as described.
There are some applications where it may be advisable to change the sensitiv-
ity thresholds for the negative-sequence or zero-sequence calculations, or it
may be desirable to disable one or both of these elements.
Selecting "Directional Element Override Enabled" allows user settings for the
negative-sequence and zero-sequence directional elements.
The settings for the negative-sequence voltage sensitivity and negative-se-
quence current sensitivity should be normally higher than the maximum nega-
tive sequence quantities generated by unbalanced load. These settings should
also be low enough to maintain sensitivity for the minimum unbalanced fault,
in terms of negative sequence quantities.
The zero-sequence directional element can be used in many applications. How-
ever, where strong mutual coupling between parallel lines exist, the zero-se-
quence calculation must be disabled to prevent an incorrect directional
determination. The sensitivity settings should be low enough to permit opera-

tion during the lowest expected ground fault in terms of zero-sequence quanti-
ties expected during a fault, and high enough to allow for normal load
imbalance.
Directional Element
Override Enabled Enable / Disable
Negative-Sequence Enable / Disable
V2 Sensitivity Level (volts secondary) 0.5 to 5.0
I2 Sensitivity Level (amps secondary) 0.1 to 1.0 (5A)

0.02 to 0.20 (1A)
3V0 Sensitivity Level (volts secondary) 1.0 to 10.0
3I0 Sensitivity Level (amps secondary) 0.2 to 2.0 (5A)

0.04 to 0.40 (1A)

21P and 21N Phase The phase selector algorithm for L-PRO ensures that:
Selector • 21N only trips on single-phase-to-ground fault, so as to prevent 21N from
false tripping for phase-to-phase-to-ground faults with arc resistance
• Supervise 21P for low SIR ratios and single-phase-to-ground faults at 20%
of line reach or below.
Algorithm Details
The phase selector uses a combination of positive, negative and zero sequence
current phasors to correctly determine the faulty phase. An OR function with
angle checks between I1 and I2 as well as the angle between I2 and I0. The OR
functions allows the algorithm to adapt to various fault conditions and provide
the correct fault type. When you are energizing a line with a T-tapped load, you
may have system conditions where no pre-fault load current is available. Using
positive and negative sequence currents alone may cause an incorrect fault de-
termination if the load current is significantly large enough to affect the total
positive sequence current, which includes both load and fault current.
Angle Relationship of Positive and Negative Sequence Currents

The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the
fault type. If the load current is subtracted from the total current (i.e. only fault
current is left for angle comparison), the positive sequence (I1) and negative
sequence (I2) current phase angle relations are listed in the following table:
AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG

Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
Angle Diff. between I1A and I2A 0 120 120 180 60 60
Angle Diff. between I1B and I2B 120 0 120 60 60 180
Angle Diff. between I1C and I2C 120 120 0 60 180 60
Phase Selector Criteria for I1 and I2

The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase:
AG Fault: AngleDiff_A<45.0 and AngleDiff_B >90.0 and AngleDiff_C >90.0
BG Fault: AngleDiff_B<45.0 and AngleDiff_C >90.0 and AngleDiff_A >90.0
CG Fault: AngleDiff_C<45.0 and AngleDiff_A >90.0 and AngleDiff_B >90.0
In the above criteria only one can become true at a time. They are used to su-
pervise 21N_A, 21N_B, 21N_C respectively.

Angle Relationship of Negative and Zero Sequence Currents

The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the
fault type. The negative sequence (I2) and zero sequence (I0) current phase an-
gle relations are listed in the following table:
AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG

Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
Angle Diff. between I2A and I0 0 120 120 0 120 120
Angle Diff. between I2B and I0 120 0 120 120 120 0
Angle Diff. between I2C and I0 120 120 0 120 0 120
Phase Selector Criteria for I2 and I0

The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase:
AG Fault: AngleDiff_A<25.0
BG Fault: AngleDiff_B<25.0
CG Fault: AngleDiff_C<25.0
Though AG type of fault will be declared for a BCG fault by the above angle
criteria between I2 and I0, the characteristic of AG impedance prevents AG
from tripping because the phase selector is used for supervision only, i.e. the
phase selector is not a tripping device.
Device 21P Supervision

A 21P supervision logic is formed based on the above Phase Selector Criteria.
The phase-to-phase distance element is only allowed to operate if the faulted
phase is not involved with the element:
21P_AB Supervision = Not AG Fault and Not BG Fault
21P_BC Supervision = Not BG Fault and Not CG Fault
21P_CA Supervision = Not CG Fault and Not AG Fault
The Start of the Phase Selector

The phase selector starts only when a fault occurs. The start definition is: if 3I0
is greater than the minimum of any enabled 21N zone’s 3I0 supervision level
setting, begin the phase selector algorithm.
A buffer is used to track the pre-fault load current, which is subtracted from the
total current before checking the phase selector criteria.
During fault conditions the system frequency may change causing a drift in the
angle difference being calculated by the phase selector. The locked pre-fault
load current vector is adjusted accordingly based on this angle difference be-
tween the pre-fault positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence volt-
age during the fault. If the faulted positive sequence voltage shifts, the angle
difference is taken into account. (i.e. the same angle relationship remains along
the fault duration.)

Duration of the Phase Selector Supervision

The maximum blocking time to 21N for a phase-phase-ground fault is 2.0 sec-
onds to x seconds, where x is the maximum pickup delay in enabled 21P2 to
21P4, and then plus 8 cycles (8 cycle is the maximum breaker opening time).
This ensures that if 21P didn’t trip on the phase-phase-ground fault for some
reason, we allow 21N to trip on this fault after this maximum blocking time de-
lay has expired.
Ground Indicator in 21P Event Message

3I0 is checked against the minimum of the following settings:
• 21N1: 3I0 supervision when it’s enabled
• 50N Pickup level when it’s enabled
• 51N Pickup level when it’s enabled
• 50N_67F when it’s selected as Scheme_Only or both ProLogic&Scheme
When 3I0 exceeds the minimum of the above values, a ground indicator “G”
is put in the 21P event messages, e.g. “21P Trip ABG 123.1km”
CCVT Transient When a fault occurs, especially on a line with high source to impedance ratio
Compensation on 21 (SIR), the CCVT secondary voltage can become quite different from the actual
Devices
system voltage varying in both magnitude and phase due to the transient re-
sponse of the CCVT. This transient response can cause device 21 overreach
significantly. A special CCVT transient compensation algorithm (Patent Pend-
ing) has been included in L-PRO 2100 relay to address this issue.
The CCVT transient compensation algorithm uses a combination of techniques
with digital filters, vector averages and other means to rebuild the correct volt-
age from the transient distorted voltage waveforms. This combination of tech-
niques provides a secure method for detecting and correcting CCVT transient
phenomena. On one hand, it improves the reach accuracy of 21 devices dra-
matically during the period of the CCVT subsidence transient. On the other
hand, it won’t sacrifice the relay operation speed very much. It does not add
any additional delay when the SIR is low (<1.2). In the worst case, it adds about
one cycle delay when the SIR is high (>15). For the operation time details, refer
to “IED Specifications” in Appendix A.
This compensation algorithm can be enabled or disabled through

settings. Note that this algorithm is applied to all 21 devices once it’s
enabled. For the applications without CCVTs, this compensation al-
gorithm should be disabled so as to eliminate the possible additional
delay introduced by this algorithm.

Line Energization
Supervision Logic Vpos - VposOld > 10 volts
VposOld < 30 volts Block all 21 devices

1 sec.
Ipos < 4% of Norminal Current
50 ms
Note: Vpos is the present positive sequence voltage

VposOld is the positive sequence voltage at two cycles before
Figure 4.10: Line Energization Supervision Logic
This logic has been introduced in order to prevent potentially erroneous oper-
ations of the 21 upon energizing of T tapped transmission lines that have trans-
formers connected and the PT connected on the line side of the breaker.
In this logic, the present positive sequence voltage is compared with the posi-
tive sequence voltage of 2 cycles previously. In an energization situation, the
VposOld would be near zero volts and the present Vpos would be approxi-
mately the nominal. As time goes by the old Vpos gets updated with the nom-
inal voltage and would eventually equal the present. When it gets within 10
volts secondary the top input to the AND gate would reset, go to zero, and reset
the blocking function.
The second input is the previous 2 cycle positive sequence voltage and has an
undervoltage setting of 30 volts. This input goes high to block the distance re-
lays only if the positive sequence voltage from 2 cycles back was less than 30
volts (approximately 50% nominal), so, for a line that has been previously en-
ergized and now experiences a fault, no distance relay blocking takes place.
The third input (the bottom one) produces an output only if the positive se-
quence line current is less than 4% nominal or 4.0% of 5 A secondary = 0.20
A secondary. If this current has been that low for the 1 second pickup time de-
lay this input to the AND gate would go high. For a de-energized line this input
would normally be high to allow the blocking scheme to operate if the other
two inputs are high. This input along with input two are present to help prevent
any distance relay blocking for a line that is in service and is now experiencing
a line fault.

68 Out Of Step Use the out of step (OOS) function as a tripping or a blocking function. This
function consists of 2 sets of inner and outer impedance blinders on the R-X
plane. Set the blinders to different values and to have the OOS function operate
for different system conditions. The blinders are straight lines with the same
angle as the angle chosen for the line positive sequence impedance. Outputs
from the outer and the inner blinders are available on the output matrix for use
with other types of OOS schemes or for monitoring.
Blinders
1 2 X 3 4
Line Angle
R
Figure 4.11: Iaos Overcurrent Supervision
The basic OOS scheme looks at the positive sequence impedance of the line
with respect to the line loading. If the line loading causes the impedance to
cross the outer blinder, an out of step timer is started. If the impedance does not
cross the inner blinder before this timer times out, the function produces an out-
put (either a block or trip—whichever is set) when the impedance crosses the
inner blinder. The entire activity is supervised by an overcurrent function to
prevent undesired operations for impedances far from the origin.
The logic has a timeout feature that prevents the blocking function from oper-
ating for an indefinite amount of time. Device 68 functions as either a blocking
device or tripping device. The 68 Out of Step (68 Trip or 68 Block), 68 Inner
and 68 Outer blinder logic points are available in the output matrix. These logic
points are also logged as event messages in the event log, for details see “Event
Messages” in Appendix D. In addition, the outputs from the inner and outer
blinders are available for use with ProLogic to create any application scheme
required.
If you select Device 68 to block for OOS conditions, the relay energizes the
front panel alarm LED when the 68 elements are blocking. If you select the 68
to trip for OOS conditions the relay energizes the front panel target light.
Inner Blinder Alarm

Zpos Outer Blinder Alarm
Enable Setting
50 Ipos TB
0 68 Block Out of Step
50 3I0 68 Trip
60
Figure 4.12: Out of Step

68 Out of Step
Mode Block, Off, Trip
Zone Blocking
Zone 1 Blocking Enable/disable
Out of Step Swing Timer 0.00 to 1.00 seconds
I1 Supervision 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

0.1 to 10.0 A secondary (1 A)
3I0 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

Blocking Reset Time 0.25 to 2.00 seconds
LHS Binder
Outer (R1) -100.0 to R2 ohms secondary (5 A)

-500.0 to R2 ohms secondary (1 A)
Inner (R2) R1 to R3 ohms secondary
RHS Binder
Outer (R3) R2 to R4 ohms secondary
Inner (R4) R3 to 100.0 ohms secondary (5 A)

R3 to 500.0 ohms secondary (1 A)

Dead Line Pickup When energizing a line that has been out of service, the line may have a fault
on it. This function is called Dead Line Pickup or sometimes called switch on
to fault. If the line potential is derived from bus PTs, the distance relay function
acts normal and operates for any fault that exists when the line is energized. If
the line uses line PTs, the output of these line PTs is zero. Because of this, op-
eration of the line distance functions may be undefined. To provide protection
to detect faults when a line is first energized, the dead line pickup function is
involved.
2 sec
27 Vpos
100ms
50ILa RMS
4% I nominal
RMS fixed { 50ILb RMS
50ILc RMS
200ms
100ms Dead-Line-Pickup Trip
50ILa RMS
50ILb RMS 50 Trip
50ILc RMS 50N Trip
50 3IO
IL2a / IL1a
2nd harmonic
block IL2b / IL1b
IL2c / IL1c
2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable
Figure 4.13: Dead Line Pickup
The Dead Line Pickup function uses voltage and current to determine whether
the line is energized. The logic diagram shows how the circuit actually works.
On energization the line voltage is zero allowing you to set the phase and neu-
tral overcurrent relay function to trip if a fault is present on the line. These
overcurrent functions must be set to see any faults at the end of the line.
When the line current of 4% of I nominal secondary or greater stays on for
greater than 200 ms, the circuit is disabled, allowing the distance relays to take
over protection of the line. If faults occur after the line has been energized, a
voltage level of 75% could be present. The circuit does not react because of a
2 second delay on the voltage reset. No output from this function occurs be-
cause the blockout feature associated with the line current is greater than 0.2 A
secondary.
If you are concerned about line current being less than 0.2 A secondary at any
time during the inservice period, you can introduce a breaker auxiliary contact
into the logic using a ProLogic statement (e.g. ProLogic Statement = Dead
Line Pickup + External Input Breaker Closed). The breaker status can be either
an “a” or “b” contact. Using the breaker contact supervision ensures no opera-
tion of the Dead Line Pickup function with the line breaker closed after the en-
ergization period.
In addition to this logic, a second harmonic restraint logic allows the line to be
more easily energized if the line is T-tapped with an online reactor or trans-
former. Energization of the line with the T-tapped device results in 2nd har-
monics that allows the line to be energized. If a fault exists that exceeds the line
high set overcurrent devices, the line is allowed to trip.

Dead Line Pickup
Dead Line Pickup Enable/disable
Device 27 Vpos Pickup 0.0 to 69.0 volts secondary
Device 50 Pickup 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

Device 50N Pickup 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

Second Harmonica Restraint Enabled/disabled
I2/I1 Ratio 0.0 to 10.0
Weak Infeed Weak Infeed provides tripping if fault levels are too low to activate the distance
units. If enabled, this function sends a permissive trip signal even if the fault
level seen by the relay is very low as when the line breaker is open. The posi-
tive sequence and zero sequence voltage detectors allow the relay to echo back
a permissive signal to allow the end with fault current to trip quickly without
the need for an auxiliary b contact.
Weak Infeed
Weak Infeed Enable/disable
Device 27 V1 Pickup 0.0 to 69.0 volts secondary
Device 59 V0 Pickup 0.0 to 100.0 volts secondary
Zone 2/Zone 4 Reset Delay (TWD1) 0.02 to 0.20 seconds
Communication Cycle Reset Delay (TWD2) 0.02 to 0.20 seconds
Communication Reset Time Delay (TW3) 0.02 to 100.0 seconds

25/27/59 Sync Check The relay can bring in voltages from both line and bus PTs. The Line Sync
Check function, if enabled, looks at the voltage steady state angle between the
bus and the line PT voltage. If this angle is within a plus/minus specified value,
(+/- 1 to 50 degree magnitude range of setting available), the function enables
a definite time delay pickup (user-selectable 0 to 10.00 seconds) after which
time an output is produced.
The line sync reference voltage is taken from a bus source. L-PRO can bring
one single-phase to neutral voltage. Logic within the relay allows the single-
phase quantity to be either A, B or C phase. All unused single-phase inputs
must be grounded for proper operation.
The Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main
Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive
sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition. The volt-
age is fixed at 20 volts secondary, voltages below 20 volts are declared a dead
state and voltages above 20 volts are declared a live state.
When enabled, this function checks that the voltage angle between the line PT
and bus PT are within a specified value. You can use this function to ensure
that closing a line to a system will result in acceptable power flow. The func-
tion uses positive sequence voltage, and therefore, can accommodate single-
phase sources as well as 3-phase sources. If a single-phase source is used, it
must be connected to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input.
For example: If only a B-phase bus PT is available, it should be connected to
the relay input B-phase terminals. In this example, the voltage and angle limit
is 20 degrees with no pickup or drop out delay.
The Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main
Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive
sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition. The volt-
age is fixed at 20 volts secondary. Voltages below 20 volts are declared a dead
state and voltages above 20 volts are declared a live state.
25/27/59 Sync Check
25 Sync Check Enable/disable
Maximum Voltage 60.0 to 138.0 volts secondary
Minimum Voltage 40.0 to 69.9 volts secondary
Angle Difference 1.0 to 50.0 degrees
Pickup Delay 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
Main/Aux
Enable Dead Main Live Aux. (DMLA) Enable/disable
Enable Live Main Dead Aux. (LMDA) Enable/disable
Enable Dead Main Dead Aux. (DMDA) Enable/disable

79 Recloser The relay has a dedicated auto reclosure logic function.The recloser supports
up to 4 shots of reclosing with complete ring bus circuit breaker control with
or without synchronism check supervision or dead bus/dead line. Lead and fol-
low breaker settings combined with out of service timers for each breaker are
used to create flexible configuration options. The output matrix is used to map
the inputs and outputs of the 79, the output for each reclose attempt is captured
to the event log, and visual indication of an external recloser block condition
(79B) is available on the front panel. The 79 requires breaker “a” contact status
indication for each breaker.
For more information see “L-PRO Setting Example” in Appendix L.
Open Interval Timers

The lead breaker open interval times are settable for each shot (T1–T4), while
the follow breaker open interval is common for each shot attempt. The follow
breaker open interval can use the 79 follower timer (TF), or the 79 reset timer
(TD).
Lead or Follow Breakers

The 79 adds flexible lead and follow breaker options, where the lead breaker
can be in the main or auxiliary position. The 79 automatically moves the follow
breaker into the lead position after the out-of-service time delay (TC), when the
lead breaker is removed from service. If the follow breaker is removed from
service, after the out-of-service time delay (TC), there is no follow breaker re-
close attempts. When a TC timer has expired it does not reset until the breaker
status changes for at least 10.0 seconds or the relay is powered down.
External Reclose Blocking

The 79 also supports blocking from external devices via the output matrix and
the internal 79 Lockout indication. You can control the 79 remotely or locally
with external or virtual inputs.
Lockout Indication
Lockout indication is provided for the lead and follow breaker. The lead and
follow lockout indication is set for a fixed time delay pickup of the close signal
time (TP) plus 1.0 second. When the recloser goes to the lead lockout condi-
tion, the breaker out of service timers are set to zero seconds and automatically
pick up. If the recloser is in the lead lockout state, the logic remains in that state
for setting (TD) seconds after the main or auxiliary breaker is manually closed.
The follow lockout condition occurs when the follow breaker receives a close
signal and the breaker remains open. If the recloser is in the follow lockout
state, the logic remains in that state for setting (TD) seconds after the follow
breaker is manually closed.

79 Recloser
79 Recloser Enable/disable
Number of Shots 1 to 4
First Reclose (T1) 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
Second Reclose (T2) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Third Reclose (T3) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Fourth Reclose (T4) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Close Time (Tp) 0.1 to 1.0 seconds
Lockout Time (TD) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Initiate Reset (TDI) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Recloser Mode Main only
Block Reset (TDB) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Time (TF) 0.0 to 24.9
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Sequence Switch
Close after the Recloser Follower Time (TF) On/off
Close after the Recloser Reset Time (TD) On/off
Sync Control Enabled/disable
The recloser provides flexibility with lead and follow breaker options. The lead
breaker is in the main or auxiliary position. This allows you to control the lead
circuit breaker with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead
Auxiliary, Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervi-
sion (angle limit and voltage limit). You also have the ability to control the 79
remotely or locally with external or virtual inputs. The 79 recloser monitors the
breaker contact “a” status and automatically moves the follow breaker into the
lead position when the lead breaker is removed from service, after an out-of-
service time delay setting. For details of auto-recloser examples see “L-PRO
Setting Example” in Appendix L.
Sync Control
The flexibility provided with device 79 allows you to control 1 or 2 circuit
breakers with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead Auxiliary,
Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervision (slip fre-
quency). Sync control is provided on the lead breaker only, because the follow
breaker always recloses after the lead breaker has successfully closed. ProLog-
ic can be used to supervise follow breaker closing attempts if an external input
is used to signal that the follow breaker has a valid sync check signal from an
external device (e.g. PLC).

59 Main/Auxiliary L-PRO provides overvoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs. These
Overvoltage functions are definite time delay functions.
Gate Switch (Setting)

59 Va Main
59 Vb Main
T
59 Vc Main
0
Figure 4.14: 59 Main Overvoltage
The definite time delay main overvoltage function, similar to the undervoltage
function, looks at all 3 phase-to-neutral voltages. This function uses the RMS
voltages to make this determination of overvoltage and is settable to an AND
or OR logic.
The auxiliary overvoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main
overvoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in-
puts.
59 Overvoltage
Main Enable/disable
Gate Switch AND or OR
Pickup 1.0 to 138.0 volts secondary
Auxiliary Enable/disable

27 Main/Auxiliary L-PRO provides undervoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs.
Undervoltage These functions are definite time delay functions.
The definite time main undervoltage function looks at the phase-to-neutral
voltage of all 3 phases to determine an undervoltage condition. The fundamen-
tal RMS voltage is used for this calculation. If any of the phase-to-neutral volt-
ages is below the set value, the function starts the definite time delay timer.
You can set this function to be an AND or OR logic.
The auxiliary undervoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main
undervoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in-
puts.
Gate Switch (Setting)

27 Va Main
27 Vb Main
T
27 Vc Main
O
Figure 4.15: 27 Undervoltage
27 Undervoltage
Main Enable/disable

60 AC Loss of
Potential 27 VLa (0.75 pu fixed)
27 VLb (0.75 pu fixed) 168
27 VLc (0.75 pu fixed)
59 VLa (0.1 pu fixed)
59 VLb (0.1 pu fixed) 175 171
176 0
dVpos/dt > 3V/cycle 173 174
17ms
dVpos/dt < -3V/cycle
0 5ms
ABS | dIpos/dt | > 0.1A/cycle 169
20ms
12ms
50 Ipos
167
50 3I0
50 ILA (4% I nominal)

172
50 ILB (4% I nominal) 170
50 ILC (4% I nominal)
Figure 4.16: Loss of Potential
The L-PRO distance elements (21P and 21N) are supervised by both instanta-
neous non-directional overcurrent and the loss of potential (LOP) logic to pre-
vent false trip due to the loss of potential, where the phase distance elements
are supervised by the delta current (i.e. Ia-Ib, Ib-Ic and Ic-Ia), and the ground
distance elements are supervised by both the phase current and the zero se-
quence (3I0) current.
The loss of potential (LOP) function uses rate of change values for the positive
sequence voltage and current signal along with voltage and current supervision
to detect loss of potential conditions. This function operates very fast and been
field proven to block the distance elements during potential transferring be-
tween buses.
The function looks for a negative rate of change on the positive sequence volt-
age while determining if the positive sequence current is changing. A loss of
potential in itself should result in only a loss of voltage or a negative rate of
change of voltage. A fault results in a high rate of change of current as well. In
some rare cases there is a negative rate of change of fault current, therefore we
use an absolute rate of change of current. When the loss of potential condition
is detected, it is latched until all the 3-phase voltages are above 75% or a pos-
itive rate of change of voltage is detected. So the circuit detects a loss of poten-
tial that results in a voltage of less than 75%. Select positive and zero sequence
current blocking functions above the maximum load current, this ensures that
LOP does not pick up on fault.
A dropout timer has been added on the di/dt signal (in front of gate 169) to en-
sure that the di/dt signal won’t reset earlier than the dv/dt signal. This change
improves the security of the algorithm in some particular fault situations.
60 Loss of Potential
60 Loss of Potential Enable/disable

I1 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)
3I0 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

If this function is enabled and an AC Loss of Potential takes place, an output

contact can be closed.
Loss of potential causes an alarm and distance elements will be blocked. Pos-
itive and Zero sequence current settings provided will block this function for
faults. If voltage goes below 75% nominal (49.8 volts) and the currents ob-
tained do not exceed the settings, the loss of potential will be initiated.
Note that the positive and zero sequence current blocking level
should be set above the maximum line current. This function is fast
enough to provide blocking of the distance functions for schemes that
use bus potential inputs that are sometimes transferred without the
need for any external blocking inputs.
Logic
Description (for details see Figure 4.16: Loss of Potential on page 4-24)
Element
167 When 50Ipos or 503I0 exceed their set point and go high (1) it will invert and
block logic element 169
168 When one of the phase-to-ground potentials falls below 0.75 pu, the logic ele-
ment’s output is high.
169 To declare a LOP, this element must have a negative rate of change of positive
sequence voltage below or less than 3 volts/cycle - AND - an absolute value of
rate of change of positive sequence current below or less than 0.1 A/cycle - AND
-not have a positive sequence load current (50 Ipos) above the setting.- OR - not
have 3 times zero sequence fault current (3Io) above the setting of 3Io.
170 LOP is declared by this logic element (logic high) when any of the phase currents
are above 0.2 A.
171 Has an output when o/p from 168 is high - AND - o/p from logic 173 is high - AND
- "NOT" logic 176 high. (Positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater
than 3 volts/cycle and not 3 phase voltage greater than 0.1 pu).
172 Has an output when o/p from 170 is high - AND - positive sequence rate of
change voltage is not greater than 3 volts/cycle.
173 Has an output when o/p from 171 is high - OR - timed o/p from logic 169 is high.
174 Has a Loss of Potential (LOP) output when o/p from 168 is high - AND - o/p from
logic 172 is high - AND - o/p from logic 173 is high. The output is timed on drop
out. This output is sent to other elements of the relay to give indication and block
voltage elements, such as impedance from tripping falsely from loss of potential
condition.
175 Phase voltage AØ and BØ and CØ greater that 0.1pu will have output HIGH
176 Logic element 175 HIGH AND positive sequence rate of change voltage is not
greater than 3 volts/cycle - output HIGH, will invert into element 171 to Block tun-
ing 171 off.

81 Frequency The relay has 4 frequency devices available. Each frequency element
can be set to operate either at a fixed level of under-frequency, a fixed
level of over-frequency, or at a rate of change level (df/dt). The df/dt
function can be set to operate for a positive rate of change or a negative
rate of change. Each frequency element has a definite time delay setting
to create a time delayed output. A fixed level of positive sequence volt-
age of 0.25 pu provides an undervoltage inhibit on each element
T
Frequency (Hz)
O
Figure 4.17: Frequency Fixed Level
T
df/dt (Hz/s)
O
Figure 4.18: Frequency Rate of Change
81 Over/Under Frequency
81-1 Disabled/Fixed Level/Rate of Change
Pickup 50.000 to 59.995 or 60.005 to 70.000 (fixed level)

-10.0 to -0.1 or 0.1 to 10.0 (rate of change)
Pickup Delay 0.05 to 99.99 seconds (fixed level)

0.20 to 99.99 seconds (rate of change)






Four frequency elements are provided with adjustable definite time de-
lays. Frequency is determined from the main voltage input (3 phase volt-
age).

50LS Overcurrent L-PRO takes in currents from 2 ring bus CTs and 2 additional CT inputs, 50LS
Input 3 and 50LS Input 4. These individual overcurrent devices can be used
with ProLogic to create your own logic. 50LS Input 3 and 50LS Input 4 are not
available in the Output Matrix.
50 I1a RMS T Low Set Overcurrent

50 I1b RMS
50 I1c RMS 0
Figure 4.19: Low Set Overcurrent
50 Low Set Overcurrent
Main Enable/disable
Pickup 0.10 to 50.00 A secondary (5 A)

Pickup 0.10 to 50.00 A secondary (5 A)


50BF Breaker The breaker failure protection function detects breaker failures. There are 2
Failure sets of breaker failure protection functions, 50BF Main and 50BF Auxiliary,
one for each breaker. When breaker failure is initiated by a trip or other internal
logic (user-settable through the output matrix) and the breaker current still ex-
ists, 2 timers (T1 and T2, user-settable) are started. When these timers are
timed out and if the current still exists (which indicates breaker failure), the
output of this function is set high. Use the 2 outputs of this function to trip an-
other trip coil or the next level of breakers, such as bus breakers. Phase current
supervision is fixed at 4% of I nominal and is shown for a 5 A relay.
Breaker failure Initiator (from Output Matrix) T1

Output1
0
50 I 1a (fixed 0.2 amps)

50 I 1b (fixed 0.2 amps)
T2
50 I 1c (fixed 0.2 amps) Output2
0
Figure 4.20: 50BF Main Breaker Failure
50 Breaker Failure
Main Enable/disable
Pickup Delay 1 0.01 to 99.00 seconds

50/51/67 Phase Phase Overcurrent provides backup protection to the line. You can define for-
Overcurrent ward, reverse or non directional control on either 50 or 51 functions.
Device 51 provides 3 IEC inverse time curve types, 3 IEEE inverse time types
of overcurrent protection and one user-defined curve. The equation and the pa-
rameters of Device 50/51/67 are listed below.
Table 4.1: IEC and IEEE Curves
No Curve Type A B p TR
1 IEC Standard Inverse 0.14 0.00 0.02 13.5
2 IEC Very Inverse 13.50 0.00 1.00 47.3
3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80.00 0.00 2.00 80
4 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0103 0.0228 0.02 0.97
5 IEEE Very Inverse 3.922 0.0982 2.00 4.32
6 IEEE Extremely Inverse 5.64 0.0243 2.00 5.82
7 User-defined [0.001, 1000] [0.0, 10.0] [0.01, 10.0] 0.1, 100
For I > pickup For I < pickup
A TR
T  I  = TMS B + ----------------------------------- T  I  = TMS -----------------------------------
2
I p I
 ------------------ – 1  ------------------ – 1
 Pickup  Pickup
50/51/67 Phase Overcurrent
50 Enable/disable
Directional Forward, reverse or non-directional

Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)
0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)
Pickup Delay 0.00 to 99.99 seconds non-directional

0.01 to 99.99 seconds directional
51 Enable/disable
Directional Forward, reverse, non-directional

Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)
0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see for details see Table 4.1: IEC and IEEE
Curves on page 4-29.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.10 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00

50N/51N/67 Neutral Neutral overcurrent provides backup protection for line to ground faults. You
Overcurrent can define forward, reverse or non-directional control on either 50N or 51N
functions. 51N can also be configured for use in the communication scheme.
All the curve definitions are the same as the phase overcurrent except that this
function uses 3I0 rather than phase current. The equation is:
For 3I0 > pickup For 3I0 < pickup
A TR
T  3I0  = TMS B + -----------------------------------
p
T  3I0  = TMS -----------------------------------
2
3I0
 ------------------ – 1 3IO
 ------------------ – 1
50N/51N/67 Neutral Overcurrent
50N Enable/disable
Directional Forward, reverse or non-directional
Pickup (3I0) 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)

51N Enable/disable
Directional Forward, reverse, non-directional, forward & in scheme
Pickup (3I0) 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see Table 4.1: IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4-
29.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.10 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00

46-50/46-51/67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent provides further backup protection for any un-
Negative Sequence balanced faults. You can define forward, reverse or non-directional control on
Overcurrent
either 46-50 or 46-51 functions. All the curve definitions are the same as the
Phase Overcurrent. The only difference is that this function uses the negative
sequence current (I2) rather than phase current. The equation is:
For I2 > pickup For I2 < pickup
A TR
T  I2  = TMS B + -----------------------------------
p
T  I2  = TMS -----------------------------------
2
I2
 ------------------ – 1 I2
 ------------------ – 1
46-50/46-51N/67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
46-50 Enable/disable
Directional Forward, non-directional
Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)

46-51 Enable/disable
Directional Forward, reverse, non-directional
Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see for details see Table 4.1: IEC and IEEE
Curves on page 4-29.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.10 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00

Adaptive Additional The L-PRO provides an adaptive additional time delay (maximum 16 ms) re-
Delay for 50 O/C sponse to the 50 O/C elements to prevent operation during RFI testing with
Elements
minimal pickup set points and operation near pickup.
This adaptive delay is applied to: 50LS-1, 50LS-2, 50LS-3, 50LS-4, 50, 50N,
46/50.
If the Pickup Delay setting (Tp) < 20ms AND Pickup Level setting <Inominal
(nominal current), an extra 8 ms delay is added. After this 8 ms timer expires,
if I < threshold, the second 8ms extra delay will be added in addition to the
original Tp. If I > threshold after the first 8ms timer expires, only Tp is used
for the delay. (Note Tp is the setting which is less than 20ms, could be 0ms).
The threshold is equal to 2*PickupLevel if pickup is between 40%*Inominal
and Inominal (i.e. between 2A and 5A for 5ACT). The threshold is equal to
40%*Inominal if 2*PickupLevel < 40%*INominal. The threshold is equal to
Inominal if 2*PickupLevel>Inominal
Directional Control Directional overcurrent elements use the same directional element as the mho
distance elements. Overcurrent elements will operate depending on directional
setting and fault direction, when the directional element has a valid output. If
the directional element can not declare a valid direction, overcurrent elements
will operate as non-directional elements. See “Directional Element” on page 4-
7.
Z Circle Trigger
X
Figure 4.21: Z Circle Trigger
Z Circle Trigger
Z Circle Trigger Enable/disable
Positive Sequence Impedance 0.1 to 50.0 ohms secondary (5 A)

0.5 to 250.0 ohms secondary (1 A)
The Impedance Circle Trigger (Z Circle Trigger) triggers the relay to record on
a dynamic swing disturbance—only used to trigger a recording. This trigger is
usually set outside the last protection zone used and blocked during LOP con-
ditions.

Fault Locator Whenever a fault occurs and the line trips, the fault locator calculates the fault
type and the distance to the fault. This information is available from the front
display of the relay or through Port 1, 2 or the SCADA port. Fault locator can
be enabled/disabled through settings (system parameters).
The fault locator is initiated by the following logic:
• 21 Trip
• 50N Trip
• 51N Trip
• Scheme Trip
• 21 Alarm (configurable)

ProLogic ProLogic Control Statements

Using ProLogic, L-PRO can pick any of the protection functions, external in-
puts or virtual inputs and place them into Boolean-like statements. ProLogic
handles up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement; 12 statements
are possible. The results from these statements are mapped to output contacts
using the output matrix.
Special ProLogic inputs are:
• Communications receive input from ProLogic output.
• Output relay #14 as an input to ProLogic.
The ProLogic control statements are used to create Boolean-like logic. The L-
PRO can use any of the protection functions or external inputs combined with
logic gates to create a ProLogic control statement. The possible gates are AND,
NAND, OR, NOR, XOR, NXOR, and LATCH. The control can be time delay
pickup and or time delay dropout, and can drive the front panel target LED.
Twelve ProLogic control statements outputs are available and can be used in
the output matrix to customize the relay to your specific needs. Inputs to Pro-
Logic are all the elements plus previous ProLogic statements for logic nesting
usage.
The example shows A to E inputs are status points of devices that are user-se-
lectable. Each ProLogic output can be given a specific name, pickup and reset
time delay.
Op 1 Op 2
A
B Op 3
C Op 4
D Op 5
T
E O
Figure 4.22: ProLogic
ProLogic Setting Functions
Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name
Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate
Dropout Delay Delay time from dropout to a ProLogic status of low
A, B, C, D, E Relay elements as input statements
Operators Boolean-type logic gates

Group Logic Group Logic Control Statements

The L-PRO Relay has 8 setting groups (SG). You can change all relay setting
parameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters
in each setting group. Setting group changes are performed by using any one
of the 16 available Group Logic statements per setting group. The Group Logic
statements are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following excep-
tions—the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the pro-
cessing is in a slower half second cycle. Group Logic inputs statements are
driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous
Group Logic statements. Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs (with
Boolean statements), one latch state and one pickup delay timer. The active
setting group (ASG) is viewed from the Terminal Mode, the front panel or
from a record stored by the relay (the active setting group is stored with the re-
cord).
Group Logic Processing

The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the
relay protection algorithms. The processing cycle happens once every half sec-
ond (0.5 second). When using ProLogic statements remember that a latch or
dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0.5
seconds. In the example following, we will create a definite pulse length using
ProLogic, for details see “L-PRO Setting Example” in Appendix L.
Default Setting Group

The relay uses Setting Group 1 as the factory default setting group and retains
the current active setting group in memory. This allows the relay to use the last
active setting group prior to interruption of relay power as the default setting
group following power up.

Change Active Group

You can at any time change the active setting group. When you initiate a set-
ting group change, this change takes precedence over an automatic setting
group change. The terminal UI is used to change the active setting group. To
view a snapshot of the group logic data select F2 prior to making any modifi-
cation to the Active Setting Group input. The following is the flow of events
that can occur in the Active Group Screen.
Active
Group
Screen
Acess
Change or Service
Level
User
View Decision
View Only -
select <F2> Quit F2
or <F3> to
continue
System
ASG
No refreshes AG
modied
Screen
Yes
Validate
Valid
User I/P
Invalid
Confirm
Error Setting No
Msg Yes Change
Any Key
System System cancels

changes AG AG change
Satus
Msg
Any Key
Settings

Settings Saved
You can change the active setting group while saving setting changes or load-
ing settings from Offliner. The relay prompts you for a setting group to acti-
vate— you can keep the current setting group or switch to a new setting group
following the settings save.
The following is the flow of events that can occur in the Editing Settings
Screen.
Edit
Settings
Acess
Level
View Change or Service
Select Copy Accept User

Quit Selects
Group Changes
Settings
Confirm Quit
A Setting without User
<F3> Quit Load Save Enters
<Enter> view No Settings
System Yes
Copy
opens Copy
SG Screen group System
Saves all System Yes
Changes keeps
Changes
CR or
Exit
Space System asks
user for SG
Confirm to activate
System Setting
updates Copy Copy Accept
Quit
SG x to SG y Changes
and waits for SG to No
User I/P
Activate
No Yes Yes
System In
Entry Level
Satus
System cancels System copies Msg No
SG x to SG y SG x to SG y Any Key
A
Settings

The following is the flow of events that can occur in the Load Settings Screen.
Load
Settings
System opens Confirm

Acess Load Setting
Level
Change or Service Setting
Screen Load
Yes
System
System
receives user No
Timeout
file
SG to
Activate
System
processes
user file
File
Correct No
View
Yes
No Yes
System Saves
all Changes
Status
Msg
Any Key
Settings

Manual Settings Change

Relay configuration changes during a user-initiated manual setting; the change
does not disrupt the relay protection functions. The relay logs an acceptance of
the change request and puts the new setting file in service. When the new set-
ting file is queued the relay loads the new setting configuration for protection
functions to the protection processor. The relay loads the new name definitions
for indication and recording functions to the interface processor. When the re-
lay has completed loading the ancillary settings for indication purposes to the
interface processor, an event is logged to show completion of the request.
There is some lag time during the load request and the completion of the re-
quest where the interface processor associates ancillary functions with the pre-
vious setting file for approximately 5 seconds. The ancillary setting
information includes channel or ProLogic and Group Logic statements names,
front panel target light activation rules and record initiation rules.
The protection processor does not have any interruption in service.
Automatic Settings Change

Relay configuration changes during a relay-initiated setting; change does not
disrupt the relay protection functions. Since the relay setting file does not
change, the interface processor uses the new setting group ancillary setting in-
formation at the same time as the protection processor switches to the new set-
ting group. An event is logged to show when the new setting group is in
service.

Communication-Aided Scheme
The L-PRO Relay provides 4 communication aided tripping scheme options.
Permissive over-reaching transfer trip (POTT), a combination of POTT with
weak infeed (WI), directional comparison blocking (DCB) or permissive un-
der-reaching transfer trip (PUTT) are available to be used with external tele-
communications devices for enhanced tripping of the protected line. The
combination of phase distance, ground distance and neutral overcurrent ele-
ments provide flexible setting options for the selected communication aided
tripping scheme.
Logic for 2 communication receivers can be used for 3 terminal lines or if the
telecommunications use 2 separate communication channels. You can set the
communications receivers to use one of 9 external inputs or one of the 12 Pro-
Logic statements. The same input cannot be shared between the 2 communica-
tion receivers.
The output matrix is used to configure the communications scheme send (per-
missive trip or block), and the communications scheme trip (local tripping) to
any combination of the 14 available output contacts. The user-set dropout ex-
tension on output contacts is eliminated on any contact that is configured to op-
erate for the communication scheme send signal; you can provide your own
dropout time delay with timer setting TD3.
The communications aided tripping scheme options use the general distance
and overcurrent protection functions of the L-PRO, along with directional
overcurrent elements specifically included in the scheme. These elements use
the memory polarization as described in the “Relay Method of Memory Polar-
ization” on page 4-5 and the directional element as described in “Directional
Element” on page 4-7.
50/51N - OC Carrier The carrier start logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 2 distance elements,
Trip and Block Logic but the L-PRO provides 2 directional neutral overcurrent elements that can be
used in addition to the Zone 2 distance elements. The device 51N time over-
current element, and the 50N/67F instantaneous overcurrent if enabled can be
configured to drive the carrier start logic. The 51N is configured in the 50N/
51N screen, while the 50N/67F is configured in the scheme selector screen,
both elements are forward directional elements.
The carrier block logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 4 distance ele-
ments, but the L-PRO provides one directional neutral overcurrent element that
can be used in addition to the Zone 4 distance elements. The device 50N/67R,
if enabled, can be configured to drive the carrier block logic. The 50N/67R is
configured in the scheme selector screen and is a reverse directional element.
The scheme selector can also be configured to enable the 50N/67F and 50N/
67R directional overcurrent elements as inputs to ProLogic statements. The
50N/67F element can be set to either forward directional or non-directional
when you select the action, “ProLogic Only”.
If the pickup delay setting (Tp) < 9ms, 9ms will be used for the delay. Other-
wise Tp will be used for the delay. This change is always applied regardless of
the direction setting (Non-dir, FWD, REV) and the 3I0 pickup level.

Note: If the directional element can not determine a valid direction, the direc-
tion is set to "forward", the 50N/67F may operate, and the 50N/67R element is
blocked. See “Directional Element” on page 4-7.
Basic Logic The basic selection does not provide any communication-aided logic for local
or remote protections.
101
Receiver #1
Receiver #2 102 103
PUTT SCHEME (+)
21-2
50N-67R
104 21-4 R 105
Receiver #1 0
Receiver #2 106
(If DCB shceme is TD2
107
selected, Zone 4 must TL2
be set reverse) 0
DCB SCHEME
6ms
108
TWD1
60 110 0
3ms 111
TWD3
TWD2
20ms
0 112
27 V1
113
59 V0 Weak Infeed Enable
WEAK INFEED LOGIC Switch
Receiver #1
120
Receiver #2
(+)
51NAlarm 115
117
TL1
116
TD1
50N-67F 119 DCB PUTT DCB PUTT
114 21-2 118
21P2 POTT BASIC POTT BASIC
21N2
TL3
Send
TD3
TL3, TD3 range: 0-1s
SCHEME SELECTOR
POTT SCHEME
Trip
3I0 > Pickup
TCS
Forward 121
0
Non-directional 21N4
21P4
(+) 21N2
21P2
3I0 > Pickup TCB 21N1
Reverse 122 0
21P1
Figure 4.23: Communication-aided Scheme

POTT Logic The POTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over-reaches
the remote end for forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 4.23: Com-
munication-aided Scheme on page 4-41. The local end sends a permissive trip
signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements operates.
The scheme send signal (permissive transfer trip send) is time delayed by timer
setting TL3; the local end is required to sense a forward fault for durations
greater than TL3. The local end does not produce a scheme trip output unless
the remote has detected a forward directional fault and sends the similar per-
missive trip signal to the local end. The local end senses a permissive trip re-
ceive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the
fault contribution from the local end. The remote end acts in a similar fashion
and the fault contribution is removed from the remote end.
Current reversal logic guards against incorrect permissive tripping for installa-
tions with parallel lines where one end of the un-faulted line is contributing
fault current and the other end of the un-faulted line is over-reaching and send-
ing a permissive trip signal. The local reverse directional elements are used
with the permissive receive signal from the remote end to form the blocking
logic. The blocking logic is time delayed by timer setting TL1; the local end is
required to sense reverse faults while receiving the remote permissive trip for
durations greater than TL1. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme
send and scheme trip signals when the reverse fault detection or permissive trip
receive signals go low. Timer setting TD1 determines the current reversal
block extension time.
For line terminals with a weak source, fault conditions could occur on the pro-
tected line where no elements operate at the weak source. Weak infeed (WI)
logic enables the relay to protect lines where one end of the line has no source
or has a very weak source. The WI scheme can only be enabled if you have se-
lected the POTT scheme otherwise it is disabled. If enabled, the WI feature en-
hances the POTT tripping logic.
WI enables the POTT scheme to quickly isolate line faults where one end of
the line has a high source of impedance.
During fault conditions where no weak source elements pick up the WI logic
echoes back the permissive transfer trip signal received by the weak source. If
a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end, AND 110, AND
111 and OR 115 echo a POTT signal back to the remote end. The permissive
transfer trip signal is required to last for durations greater than 20ms. A 3ms
time delay pickup and time delay dropout timer TWD2 determine the amount
of time between permissive transfer trip receive signals that the scheme echoes
back. If the permissive transfer trip receive signal is constantly high the WI
logic only echoes back for a time equal to TWD3 plus 3ms. If the PT signal
being received resets then starts up again, after timer setting TWD2, a new per-
missive transfer trip signal echoes back.
The WI logic blocks when forward or reverse faults are detected, the logic is
also blocked for a loss of potential condition. During a reverse or a forward
fault condition, the Zone 2, Zone 4, 51N, or 50N/67 elements could pick up. If
any of these functions pick up, they block the WI scheme by putting a high in-
put into inverted input of AND 110. The blocking condition is required last for
durations greater than 6 ms. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme

send and scheme trip signals when the fault detection or loss of potential sig-
nals go low. Timer setting TWD1 determines the block extension time. TWD1
should be set to coordinate with the communication-reset time of the PT signal.
It should be set greater than the time it takes for the remote end’s Zone 2 to re-
set and for the PT channel to reset.
Timer setting TWD2 should be set to a time that prevents chattering of the
communications channel. If TWD2 is allowed to reset before the remote end
(strong source) clears the fault and stops sending the permissive transfer trip
signal the WI echoes back another block of permissive transfer trip send.
The WI logic is also used to provide local tripping if both ends of the line are
to be isolated. The line voltages provide supervision with a positive sequence
under-voltage element (27V1) and a zero sequence over-voltage element
(59V0). If a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end, AND
110, AND 112, OR 113 and OR 119 provide a local tripping signal.
DCB Logic The DCB logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over-reaches
the remote end for forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 4.23: Com-
munication-aided Scheme on page 4-41. Typically DCB is used when the com-
munications link may be disrupted during fault conditions, for example power
line carrier. The local end sends a block trip signal to the remote end when one
of the enabled reverse directional elements operates. The scheme send signal
(block trip send) is time delayed by timer setting TL3, the local end is required
to sense a reverse fault for durations greater than TL3. If one of the forward
directional elements operates the blocking logic does not operate. For forward
directional fault conditions the DCB logic is time delayed by timer setting TL2.
The forward fault condition has to last for durations greater than TL2. The local
end does not produce a scheme trip output if the remote has detected a reverse
directional fault and sends the similar block trip signal to the local end. The lo-
cal end senses a block trip receive signal and the scheme trip logic is disabled
with no intentional delay. Current reversal logic guards against incorrect local
tripping for installations with parallel lines where one end of the un-faulted line
is contributing fault current and the other end of the un-faulted line is reverse-
reaching and sending a block trip signal. The local forward directional ele-
ments are supervised by the block receive signal from the remote end to form
the blocking logic. The blocking logic reset is time delayed by timer setting
TD2; the local end is required to receive the remote block trip for durations
greater than 0 ms. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme trip signals
when the block trip receive signal goes low. Typically the block reset timer
TD2 is set longer than the forward directional elements reset time.

PUTT Logic The PUTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end under-reach
the remote end for close in forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 4.23:
Communication-aided Scheme on page 4-41. The local end sends a permissive
trip signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements op-
erates (Zone 1 distance elements). The scheme send signal (permissive transfer
trip send) is time delayed by timer setting TL3, the local end is required to
sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL3. The remote end does not
produce a scheme trip output unless a forward directional fault is detected and
the local end has sent the permissive trip signal. The remote end senses a per-
missive trip receive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and
removes the fault contribution from the remote end. The remote end can act
quicker for fault conditions where the Zone 2 faults would be time delayed un-
less the close in fault condition was not transferred by the scheme send.

Recording Functions
The relay has high speed fault recording and logging functions to allow you to
analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme.
Slow speed swing recording can be used to analyze system stability. If the relay
has reached its recording capacity, new records overwrite the oldest records.
Fault Recording The relay provides DFR-quality fault recording, capturing input signal wave-
forms and external input states at a rate of 96 samples per cycle. Each record
also contains the timing of the internal logic produced by the relay (e.g. Device
51 trip). Obtain this information by uploading the records from the relay via
the terminal mode file transfer process and view them with RecordBase View
software.
The quantities recorded are:
• 18 analog channels (6 voltages and 12 currents)@ 96 samples/cycle up to
the 25th harmonic
• External inputs @ 1 ms resolution
• Protection element output signals @ 8 samples/cycle
• ProLogic signals @ 8 samples/cycle
• Active setting group
Parameters that are user-selectable with respect to recording transients:
• Record length (0.2 to 2.0 seconds => 12 to 120 cycles @ 60 Hz Base) with
automatic extension to capture successive triggers
• Recorder triggering by any internal logic or external input signal
Swing Recording The L-PRO records dynamic system responses allowing you to analyze system
stability and to provide a larger context for fault analysis. Swing records con-
tain positive sequence phasor measurements and system frequency calculated
at a rate of 1 phasor per cycle. Swing records can extend to 3 minutes in dura-
tion.
The quantities recorded are:
• Positive sequence impedance (magnitude)
• Positive sequence voltage (magnitude)
• Positive sequence current (magnitude)
• 3-Phase Vars (reactive power)
• 3-Phase Watts (real power)
Event Recording The event recording provides permanent storage for the event log. You can cre-
ate an event record automatically or manually. When the event auto save is en-
abled, an event record is created approximately every 230 events.
You can initiate an event manually though the terminal user interface. The
command Event Recording is available under the Records>Event Recording
menu.

Record Initiation Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal
condition is detected. You can set the relay to initiate a fault record on activa-
tion of any of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external digital
inputs.
The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay functions is done
through the relay’s Output Matrix settings.
A recording can also be initiated manually through the terminal user interface.
The commands Fault Recording, Swing Recording and Event Recording are
available under the Records menu.
A swing record can take a couple of minutes to produce due to the

long post-trigger time.
Record Duration The length of each record is determined by the Record Length setting. Tran-
and Extension sient record lengths can be set between 0.2 and 2.0 seconds; swing record
lengths can be set between 30 and 120 seconds. Pre-trigger times are fixed at
10 cycles for transient records and 30 seconds for swing records and are includ-
ed as part of the normal record length.
The L-PRO automatically extends a record as required to capture consecutive
triggers that are close together. If a trigger occurs while a recording is in prog-
ress, the record is stretched to include the full post-trigger time of subsequent
triggers, up to a maximum length—2.0 seconds for transient records; 180 sec-
onds for swing records. If a trigger occurs before the end of a record caused by
a previous trigger, but too late to allow sufficient post-trigger time in a maxi-
mum extended record, a new overlapping record is created.
The normal record lengths settings are accessible under the Recording heading
of the relay settings, and can be set from either the terminal user interface or
the Offliner Settings software.
Record Storage The L-PRO compresses records on the fly, achieving a typical lossless com-
pression rate of 4:1. As a result, the L-PRO can store up to 30 seconds of tran-
sient recordings and up to 24 minutes of swing recordings in non-volatile
storage. If the storage is full, new records automatically overwrite the oldest,
ensuring that the recording function is always available.

Logging Functions
Event Log The relay maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log. Each entry con-
tains the time of the event plus an event description.
Logged events include trips, alarms, external input assertions plus internal
events such as setting changes. Phase information is included in event messag-
es where appropriate. For example, the event log entry for a device trip might
be:
2000 Nov 21, 15:34:19.832: 51 on ABC Trip
The event log can be viewed in 2 ways:
Front Panel The front panel display shows events in abbreviated form
(Trip and Alarm events only).
Terminal User Interface The full event log is available through the Event Log menu of
the terminal user interface.
This display is a snapshot of the event list which must be manually

refreshed to display new events that occur while the display is up.
There is a list of Event Messages, for details see “Event Messages”

in Appendix D.

5 Offliner Settings Software
Setting Tree Setting Area

Figure 5.1: Opening Screen
Introduction
Use the Offliner Settings software to create relay settings on a PC. Offliner Set-
tings provides an easy way to view and manipulate settings.
PC System Hardware
Requirements
The minimum hardware requirements are:
• 1 GHz processor
• 2 GB RAM
• 20 GB available hard disk space
• USB port
• Serial communication port
Operating System
The following software must be installed and functional prior to installing the
applications:
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or
• Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1 32-bit or 64-bit

Installing PC Software
Insert the CD-ROM in your drive. The CD-ROM should open automatically.
If the CD-ROM does not open automatically, go to Windows Explorer and find
the CD-ROM (usually on D drive). Open the L-PRO.exe file to launch the CD-
ROM.
To install the software on your computer, click the desired item on the screen.
The installation program launches automatically. Installation may take a few
minutes to start.
To view the L-PRO User Manual you must have Adobe Acrobat on your com-
puter. If you need a copy, download a copy by clicking on Download Adobe
Acrobat.
Anti-virus/Anti-spyware Software
If an anti-virus/anti-spyware software on your local system identifies any of
the ERLPhase applications as a “potential threat”, it will be necessary to con-
figure your anti-virus/anti-software to classify it as “safe” for its proper oper-
ation. Please consult the appropriate anti-virus/anti-spyware software
documentation to determine the relevant procedure.
Offliner Features
The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar.
Help - Help Topics

About L-PRO Settings
New Save Copy Undo Copy About

Setting
Open Cut Paste Copy Group Print Show or Hide
Graph Left-Hand Side
Tree
Figure 5.2: Top Tool Bar
Tool Bar
Windows Menu
Icon Restore, minimize, close.
File New, open, close, save, save as, print setup.
Edit Undo, cut, copy, paste.
Window Cascade, tile, arrange icons.
Help Help Topics, About L-PRO Settings.

Settings Program Icons
New Open new default settings file.
Open Open any valid settings file.
Save Save current settings file.
Cut Edit function.
Copy Edit function.
Paste Edit function.
Undo Edit function.
Copy Graph Copy to clipboard.
Copy Setting Copy from Setting Group X to Setting Group Y.

Group
Print Print from Output Matrix or any graph.
About Version number.
Show or Hide Left- Show or Hide Left-Hand Side Tree

Hand Side Tree
Graphing Protection Grid On/Grid Off

Functions
The graph can be viewed with the grid on or off by clicking the Grid On or Grid
Off button. A right-click on the trace of the curve gives you the x and y coor-
dinates.
Print Graph
To print a particular graph, click the Print Graph button.
Zoom on Graphs
Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display. Left-
click on any graph and drag to form a small box around the graph area. When
you release the mouse, the trace assumes a new zoom position determined by
the area of the zoom coordinates.
To undo the zoom on the graph, click the Refresh button.

Handling Backward Compatibility

Offliner Settings displays the version number in the second pane on the bottom
status bar. The settings version is a whole number (v1, v2, v3, v4, etc.).
The Offliner Settings is backward compatible; open and edit older settings files
and convert older settings files to a newer version. Offliner settings handles
forward conversion only—it converts an older setting file to a newer setting
file.
Converting a 1 Open the setting file you wish to convert.

Settings File
2 In the File menu, select Convert to... and then select the version x (where x
is the newer version). A dialogue box pops up prompting Offliner for a new
file name. Use either the same file name or enter a new file name. The con-
version process inserts default values for any newly added devices in the
new setting file. When the conversion is complete, Offliner Settings dis-
plays the new file.
Figure 5.3: Converting Setting Files
Sending a New 1 Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the set-
Setting File to the ting file match. The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial num-
Relay
ber or the settings version do not match.
A “serial number discrepancy” message may appear. This is to en-

sure that you are aware of the exact relay in which settings are to
be loaded. If this happens, check the relay serial number using the
terminal mode ID menu item. Type this serial number into the L-
PRO Serial No. box in the Identification tab display area of Offliner
Settings. Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number
check box to bypass serial number supervision.
2 Check the serial number and the settings version of the relay, for details see
“ID” on page 3-10. The Device Serial Number and Required Settings Ver-
sion on the Identification screen indicate the serial number and the settings
version of the relay.
Creating a Setting 1 Offliner Settings displays a default setting file on start up showing the set-
File from an Older tings version in the bottom status bar. As an example L-PRO Offliner is
Version
shipped with a set of default sample files of older settings versions. These
sample files are “v1 sample.lps”, “v2 sample.lps”, “v3 sample.lps”, etc.
Each sample file contains default values of an older settings version. For a

new installation these sample files are placed in the default directory
C:\Program Files\ERLPhase\L-PRO Offliner Settings, or you can choose
the path during the Offliner software installation. If an older version of L-
PRO Offliner was previously installed on your PC, then the default directo-
ry may be C:\Program Files\APT\L-PRO Offliner Settings.
2 Open a sample file of the desired version. Use File/Save As to save the sam-
ple file to a new file name. Then edit the setting file and the serial number,
save it and load it into the relay.
RecordBase View Software
Figure 5.4: RecordGraph
Use RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a relay.
1 Set the receive directory on your terminal program to point to a convenient
directory on your PC’s hard disk or network. For example with HyperTer-
minal, select Transfer>Receive File to set the receive directory.
2 Select one or more records on the relay using the List function in the Ter-
minal Mode’s Records menu.
3 Initiate transfer of the selected records by selecting R on the keyboard.
4 Start the RecordBase View program and use the File>Open menu command
to open the downloaded record files located in the receive directory speci-
fied in step 1.
For further instructions refer to the RecordBase View Manual at the

back of the printed version of this manual.

Main Branches from the Tree View
RHS - Information relating to specific menu Item,

LHS Menu Tree accessed by LHS menu or top tabs.
Standard I/O
Optional I/O
Unique relay serial Nominal System Nominal CT Sec.

number Frequency - set to Current - set to either
either 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A
Figure 5.5: Relay Identification
Identification The first screen presents all the menu items in the left menu tree. Access the
menu items by clicking the tabs at the top of the screen or the item on the left
menu tree.
Identification
Settings Version Indicates the settings version number, fixed.
Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check, if enabled.
Serial Number Available at back of each relay.
Relay ID User-defined up to 20 characters.
Nominal CT Format 5 A or 1 A
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz
Comments User-defined up to 20 characters.
Setting Software
Setting Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Date Created/Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered.
Station
Station Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Station Number User-defined up to 20 characters.
Location User-defined up to 20 characters.

Equipment Protected User-defined up to 20 characters.
Important Note
Nominal CT Secondary Current can be set to either 1 A or 5 A.
Nominal System Frequency can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Ensure setting selection matches that of target L-PRO.
The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file,
or the setting will be rejected by the relay. This feature ensures that
the correct setting file is applied to the right relay.
In Settings Version 7 or greater you can choose to ignore the serial

number enforcement in the identification screen. The relay only
checks for proper relay type and setting version if the ignore serial
number has been chosen, requires relay firmware version 3.0 or
greater.
Analog Inputs
Figure 5.6: Analog Inputs
Analog Input Names screen identifies all the ac voltage and current inputs to
the relay. These names appear in any fault disturbance records the relay pro-
duces.

Analog Inputs
Main Voltage LVA, LVB, LVC
Main Current LA1, LB1, LC1
Aux. Voltage BVA, BVB, BVC
Aux. Current IA2, IB2, IC2
Current IA3, IB3, IC3, IA4, IB4, IC4
External Inputs
Figure 5.7: External Inputs
External Input Names screen allows you to define meaningful names for 9 ex-
ternal digital inputs.
T.T. Refers to Transfer Trip and P.T. Permissive Trip.
1 to 9 User-defined

Output Contacts
Figure 5.8: Output Contacts
The Output Contacts are also identified during the setting procedure using
meaningful names. The dropout delay time settings are made here.
Output Contact Names
Outputs 1 to 14/21 User-defined
Dropout Timer 0.00 to 1.00 s

Virtual Inputs
Figure 5.9: Virtual Inputs
Virtual Inputs
Virtual Inputs 1 to 30 User-defined
The relay can control its internal functions and connected devices both
locally and remotely. Thirty general purpose logic points are accessible
via DNP3 and the terminal UI. The 30 virtual inputs are individually
controlled and include a set, reset and pulse function. The latch state is
retained during setting changes and relay power down conditions. The
30 virtual inputs conform to DNP3 standards. Use the DNP3 functions
such as SBO (select before operate), Direct Operate, or Direct Operate
with no acknowledge to control virtual inputs.
Use virtual inputs to:
• control circuit breakers
• enable or disable reclosing
• enable or disable under-frequency load shedding
• change setting groups
• provide interlocking between local/remote supervisory control

Setting Groups
Figure 5.10: Setting Groups
Setting Groups
Setting Groups 1 to 8 User-defined

System Parameters
Figure 5.11: System Parameters
System Parameters
System Parameters
Base MVA 1.00 to 1000.00 MVA (primary)
Target Latching On (global) Enable/disable
Phase Rotation ABC or ACB
Aux Voltage Input 3-phase/1-phase
Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Enable/disable
CT Turns Ratio
Ring Bus Configuration (Aux. CT Line Enable/disable

Input)
Main CT Turns Ratio 1.00 to 1000.00 (For protection and recording)
Aux. CT Line Input Enable/disable
Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 1.00 to 10000.00 (For protection and recording)
Current Input #3 CT Ratio 1.00 to 10000.00 (For recording and ProLogic)
Current Input #4 CT Ratio 1.00 to 10000.00 (For recording and ProLogic)
PT Turns Ratio
Main PT Turns Ratio 1.00 to 20000.00 (For Protection and Record-

ing)
Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 1.00 to 20000.00 (For protection and recording)
Line
Line to Line Voltage 1.00 to 1000.00 kV (Primary)
Distance Units km or miles

Target Latching On
This option specifies whether the front Target LED is latched or not. Target
Latching On means that the target LED remains on after a trip until it is reset
through the front by human machine interface (HMI). If the Target Latching is
set off the target light comes on during a relay trip and will reset. All targets
are stored in the relay log—250 event logs are stored.
Base MVA
The base MVA is used for recording purposes.
CT Turns Ratio and PT Turns Ratio

The CT and PT ratios are specified for the monitoring of analog inputs. All CT
and PT ratios are specified with a ratio relative to one. The line protection uses
the main current and the main voltage to operate. When 2 sets of CTs (main
and auxiliary) are used as line current input (e.g. ring bus application), you
must enable ring bus configuration to configure the relay. If enabled, the cur-
rents from the 2 sets of CTs are added to the relay to form the line current. For
cases where voltage for line protection is obtained from bus PTs, the bus PTs
are connected to the main voltage inputs.
Auxiliary Voltage Input

If a single-phase source is used, it must be connected to the corresponding
phase designation on the relay input. example: If only a B phase bus PT is
available, it should be connected to the relay input B phase terminals. All un-
used single-phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation.
SCADA
Communication
Figure 5.12: SCADA Communication
The L-PRO relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for

both Serial (Port 3) and Ethernet (TCP and UDP). For DNP3 Level 2 (TCP) up
to three independent Masters are supported.

DNP Configuration -
Point Map
Figure 5.13: Point Map
The L-PRO relay has configurable DNP point mapping. On the Point Map
screen, any of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point
List by clicking (or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard) on the
associated checkbox. A green 'X' denotes that the item will be mapped to the
Point List.
The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs, and An-
alog Inputs. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.
DNP Configuration -
Class Data
Figure 5.14: Class Data

Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen. Only
Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear here. Sections
for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here; Binary Outputs cannot be as-
signed a Class. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.
In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point, most An-
alog Inputs can also be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor.
SCADA Settings
Summary
Figure 5.15: SCADA Settings Summary
This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the
working setting file. This includes SCADA Communication parameters and (if
the SCADA mode is set to DNP) Binary Input, Binary Output, and Analog In-
put information including Deadband and Scaling factors.
This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed.

Record Length
Figure 5.16: Record Length
Record Length
Fault
Fault Record Length 0.2 to 2.0 seconds
Swing
Fault Record Length 6 to 120 seconds
Event Auto Save Enable/disable
The L-PRO Relay has recording and logging functions to analyze faults and
dynamic swing, and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme.
This item identifies the amount of time that each fault record. Prefault is fixed
at 0.16 second. There are 2 types of recording provided and the record length
times available for each type of recording, transient or swing produce a sepa-
rate record.

Setting Groups
Figure 5.17: Setting Groups Comments
The relay has 8 setting groups (SG). You can change all relay setting parame-
ters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each
setting group. Use any one of the 16 available Group Logic Statements per set-
ting group to perform Setting Group changes. The Group Logic statements are
similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions, the sole
function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the processing is in a
slower half second cycle. Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from
ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic
statements. Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs (with Boolean state-
ments), one latch state and one pickup delay timer. View the active setting
group (ASG) from the Terminal Mode, from the front panel or from a record
stored by the relay (the active setting group is stored with the record).
Line Parameters
Figure 5.18: Line Parameters

Line Parameters
Line
Line to Line Voltage kV (Primary)
Line Length 0.50 to 2000.00 km or 0.31 to 1250 miles
Sequence Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedance (Z1) 0.05 to 66.00 ohms secondary (5 A)

Positive Sequence Angle (Z1) 45.0 to 89.0 degrees
Zero Sequence Impedance (Z0) 0.05 to 66.00 ohms secondary (5 A)

Zero Sequence Angle (Z0) 45.0 to 89.0 degrees
KO
KO Override Enable/disable
KO Magnitude 0.10 to 2.00
KO Angle -25.0 to 25.0 degrees
Line Parameter Settings permit a parameter entry related to the line voltage,
CT ratio, PT ratio, line length, line secondary positive and zero sequence im-
pedance.
The K0 factor used is a default factor based on the line parameters (K0 = [Z0
- Z1] / 3Z1). You can specify by selecting K0 Override Enable.

Scheme Selector
Figure 5.19: Scheme Selector
Scheme Selector
Scheme Selection POTT, PUTT, Blocking
Communication-Aided External Input 1 to 9 and ProLogic 1 to 10
Receiver 1 External Input
Receiver 2 External Input
Scheme Send User-defined, Pickup Delay (seconds), Dropout Delay

(second)
POTT Current Reversal User-defined, Pickup Delay (seconds), Dropout Delay

(second)
DCB Scheme Zone 2
DCB Scheme Receiver
Overcurrent Carrier
O/C Start (50N–67F) Disabled, Scheme only, ProLogic only, Scheme and Pro-
Logic
O/C Carrier Block (50N–67R) Disabled, Scheme only, ProLogic only, Scheme and Pro-
Logic
L-PRO supports a Basic (no communication), a Permissive Overreaching

Transfer Tripping (POTT), a Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Tripping
(PUTT) and a Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme (DCB).

Directional Element
Figure 5.20: Breaker Status
.
Directional Elemnet
Negative Sequence Directional Element V2 range 0.5 to 5 V

I2 range 0.1 to 1 A
Zero Sequence Directional Element 3V0 range 1 to 10 V

3I0 range 0.2 to 2 A
Protection Functions
Figure 5.21: Protection Functions
For a detailed description see “Protection Functions and Specifications” on

page 4-1

ProLogic
Figure 5.22: ProLogic
Apply ProLogic to multiple inputs to create an output based on qualified in-

puts. ProLogic enables up to 12 ProLogic control statements and programs
those logics to output contacts. You can name the function being created and
set a pickup and dropout delay. Start with input A by selecting any of the relay
functions using the list for up to 5 possible inputs. Put these inputs into AND,
NAND, OR, NOR, XOR, NXOR and LATCH logics by clicking on the gate.
Invert the input by clicking on the input line.
The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2 and so forth. If de-
scribed you can illuminate the front target LED on operation of this function
by enabling this feature. The operation of the ProLogic statements are recorded
in the events log. This logic shows on the view fault records.
Group Logic The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the
relay protection algorithms. The processing cycle happens once every half sec-
ond (0.5 s). When using ProLogic statements you must keep in mind that a
latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at
least 0.5 seconds.

Output Matrix
Figure 5.23: Output Matrix
The output contact matrix determines which function initiates which output re-
lay. All output relays have an individual user-selectable stretch time, except
those outputs identified as communication initiation outputs. They can have
their time delay characteristics changed. Functions also initiate recording as re-
quired.
For a particular function to operate correctly, it must be enabled and

must also have its logic output assigned to at least one output contact
if it is involved in a tripping function.
Print the entire output matrix by right clicking on the output matrix then select-
ing the printer icon. This printout is produced on 2 pages.

Settings Summary
Figure 5.24: Settings Summary
Select Settings Summary to view and print the relay settings in text form, for
details see “IED Settings and Ranges” in Appendix B.

Settings From a Record

The settings on the relay at the time of a recording are included in every record
and can be viewed through the RecordBase View analysis software. While
viewing a recording in RecordBase View, select the View Setting button to dis-
play the settings. RecordBase View will automatically launch L-PRO Offliner
to display the settings in summary form.
If the record contains Setting Groups, the Offliner displays all Setting Groups
in the summary. Bold text in the tree view indicates an active Setting Group
(the Setting Group used at the time the record was captured). The setting sum-
mary is read-only. To edit the setting file associated with the summary, you
must use File/Save As to save the summary to a file. Then close the summary
screen and open the setting file for editing.
Figure 5.25: View Setting Summary in RecordBase View

6 Acceptance/Protection Function Test
Guide
Acceptance Testing
ERLPhase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory. A visual inspec-
tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re-
lay was not damaged during shipping.
The electronics in the relay contain static sensitive devices and are
not user-serviceable. If the front of the relay is opened for any reason
exposing the electronics, take extreme care to ensure that you and
the relay are solidly grounded.
Generally an analog metering check, as well as testing the I/O (External Inputs
and Output Contacts) is sufficient to ensure the functionality of the relay. Fur-
ther tests can be performed on delivery and acceptance of the purchaser’s op-
tion according to the published relay specifications in “IED Settings and
Ranges” in Appendix B.
The following acceptance test section is intended to be a guide for testing any
and all protection elements in the relay. The most convenient time to perform
these tests is on delivery prior to applying in-service settings. Once in-service
settings are applied, ERLPhase recommends that you test enabled functions to
ensure the designed application is fulfilled.
Test Equipment • 3 ac voltage sources (variable frequency capability)

Requirements
• 3 ac current sources
• 1 ohmmeter
• 1 - 125 Vdc test supply
Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A, and nominal

system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz. This example uses 5 A/
60 Hz.

6 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide
Calibration The relay is calibrated before it leaves the factory; but if component changes
are made within the relay, you may need to do a re-calibration.
Before you begin a new calibration, establish the accuracy of the

equipment being used.
To perform a calibration, you must be logged into the relay in Terminal Mode
at the Service access level. Proceed to the Utilities>Maintenance>Calibrate.
The Calibrate menu leads you through every analog input and prompts you to
apply the appropriate quantity.
Figure 6.1: Enter actual applied signal level
Figure 6.2: Calibration error - out of range
For example, when you select voltage VA for calibration, a prompt appears
which asks you which quantity the relay should try to calibrate. If a 66 V phase-
to-neutral quantity is applied to the back VA terminals, 66.0 V would be indi-
cated as the desired calibration.

In a similar way, you are prompted to go through all 18 ac analog quantities

and provide the information about the injected calibration quantities. You must
have a test source to perform this function. Only the magnitude of the analog
input requires calibration, not the angle.
When an analog input channel is calibrated, you can verify the quantity mea-
sured by selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu. VA
of the ac voltage input is used as a reference quantity by L-PRO. Therefore, if
it is absent, there is not a locked, valid relationship among all of the analog
quantities.
Testing the External To test the external inputs connect the relay to a laptop in Terminal Mode, Ser-
Inputs vice level>Metering>I/O. This screen displays the status of the Input and Out-
put Contacts. Placing a voltage of 125 Vdc nominal, (150 V maximum), to
each of the external inputs in turn causes the input to change from Low to High
status. These inputs are polarity sensitive and this screen has a 0.5 second up-
date rate.
Testing the Output Test the output relays to verify their integrity using the Utilities>Mainte-
Relay Contacts nance>Outputs. The output contacts are closed by pressing the Enter key. Tog-
gle the output contacts from open to closed by pressing the Enter key. Verify
the output contact status using an ohmmeter. When you exit this sub-menu,
each contact status reverts to the open position.

L-PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline

Devices to Test: • 60 AC Loss of Potential
• 21P Phase-to-Phase Impedance
• 21N Phase-to-Neutral Impedance
• Weak Infeed
• Dead Line Pickup
• 68 Out Of Step
• 27 Undervoltage
• 59 Overvoltage
• 50N/51N Neutral Overcurrent
• 50/51 Phase Overcurrent
• 46-50/46-51 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
• 50LS Low Set Definite Time Overcurrent
• 50BF Breaker Fail
• Example of Inputs 3 and 4 being used for Breaker Fail
• 81 Over/Under/Rate of Change of Frequency
• 25C Sync Check
• 79 Recloser
Download 1 Browse to find the following Offliner Setting file

Acceptance Test File “LPROaccTestsetting60hz” in C:\Program Files\ERLPhase\L-PRO Set-
tings.
2 Double-click the Setting file to open. Enter the serial number of the relay
you’re testing or check “Ignore Serial Number” checkbox.
Figure 6.3: Identification Serial Number Screen
3 Save the file.

4 Connect to the L-PRO in Service or Change mode via the L-PRO front port
(Port 1) using your terminal program’s Zmodem (e.g. HyperTerminal or
Procomm).

5 From the Main Menu select Settings.

6 From the Settings submenu select Load From Offliner.
7 Select Y, yes you are ready to continue.
8 Find Send File in your terminal software (e.g. for HyperTerminal under
“Transfer”).
About the The acceptance test setting file provided is not necessarily configured to a pro-
Acceptance Test vide a realistic setting example. Its configuration is intended to demonstrate
Setting File
simple test methods for each relay element. Tests are organized to prevent in-
terference of one protection element on the next within the relay for ease of
testing without using multiple setting files and minimizing the number of test
connection changes. All contacts in the relay will be tested if all elements in
this procedure are tested as written.
Testing all the elements is accommodated by using of the L-PRO Setting
Groups (3 groups are used).
Setting Group 1 tests elements: 21P, 21N, 68, 60, Dead Line Pickup, Weak In-
feed
Setting Group 2 tests elements: 46-50/46-51, 50/51, 50N/51N, 27, 59, 50LS,
50BF
Setting Group 3 tests elements: 25/27/59 (Sync Check), 79, 81
The file demonstrates all types of impedance characteristics available in the L-
PRO: circle, tomato, lens, quadrilateral.
Virtual Inputs are used to perform some input functions and demonstrate their
use.
In addition to, or exclusive of these tests, you may wish to perform dynamic
simulation tests on the L-PRO to verify the relay operates as per protection
scheme design using the settings that are applied for the particular line on
which the L-PRO will be installed.

Impedance Characteristics Available in L-PRO (Mho and Quadrilateral)
Figure 6.4: Mho Circle (Characteristic Angle =

90) Available for 21P and 21N
Figure 6.5: Mho Tomato (Characteristic Angle < 90)
Available for 21P and 21N
Figure 6.7: Quadrilateral Available for 21N Only
Figure 6.6: Mho Lens (Characteristic Angle >

90) Available for 21P and 21N

Basic Testing Calculations
Nominal primary voltage = 230kV
kV - = 230kV ---------------- = 115V

Nominal secondary phase-to-phase voltage = ---------------------
PTRatio 2000
Nominal secondary phase-to-neutral voltage 115V

------------- = 66.4V
= 3
Zero Sequence Impedance calculations for phase-to-ground impedance ele-

ment tests (using secondary Positive and Zero Sequence Line Impedances):
Z1 = 5.9 80 =  1.03 + j5.81 
Z0 = 16.0 74 =  4.41 + j15.38 
Z0 – Z1-
Equation 1 K0 = ------------------
3  Z1
  4.41 – 1.03  +  j15.38 – j5.81   3.38 + j9.57 10.15 70.52

= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------- = ---------------------------------- =  0.57 – 9.5 
3  5.9 80 17.7 80 17.7 80
The multiplier used to compensate phase-to-ground impedances:
Equation 2 1 + K0
=  1 + 0.57 – 9.5  =  1 + 0.562 – j0.094  =  1.562 – j0.094  = 1.569 – 3.5
21N Reach Settings

Zone 1 Reach: Mho 4.72 
Zone 2 Reach: Quadrilateral X: 7.38 , R: 6.00 
Zone 3 Reach: Mho Forward 17.7 , Reverse 0.50 
Zone 4 Reach: Mho Forward 0.00 , Reverse 4.72 
Compensated 21N1 setting 4.72  (Zone 1 phase-to-ground compensated Mho

impedance):
4.72 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 7.40 76.5

Compensated 21N2 Setting 7.38  (Zone 2 phase-to-ground compensated

quadrilateral impedance):
Reactive: 7.38 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 11.58 76.5
Resistive: 6.0 0  1.569 – 3.5 = 9.41 – 3.5
The pure resistive component 9.41  cos  – 3.5  = 9.39 0
Compensated 21N3 (Zone 3 Phase-to-ground compensated impedance):
Forward: 17.70 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 27.76 76.5
Reverse: 0.50 – 100  1.569 – 3.5 = 0.78 – 103.5
Compensated 21N4 (Zone 4 phase-to-ground compensated impedance)
Forward: 0 (must be 0 for POTT Scheme)
Reverse: 4.72 – 100  1.569 – 3.5 = 7.40 – 103.5
Ω
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
10 11 12 13 14
21 21P2 21P3 21P4 21N2 21N3 21N4 46-50 DLPU S Trip Send 68 68 IN 27/59
50BF- 60 50BF- 50BF- 50LS 50N 51N 81-1 46-51 25C 51 OUTER 27/59 Main
Main1 68 Aux1 Aux 2 81-2 81-3 50 PL1 Aux
PL2
50BF- 81-4
Main2
L-PRO 2100 SIMPLIFIED REAR VIEW
Main Line Currents Auxilliary Line Currents
Auxilliary Voltages Main Voltages Power
301 303 305 307 309 311
Supply
300 302 304 306 308 310 324 325 326 327 330 331 332 333 334 335
For Prot./Sync./Rec.
IA IB IC IN These Currents only VA VB VC VN

required for Ring Bus
Application
Regulated Voltage and Current Source
Figure 6.8: Suggested Test Connections for Acceptance Tests

Where each test specifies Metering/Logic, you view the following terminal
screens (the Protection Logic is broken up into 2 screens to allow all elements
to be displayed).
Figure 6.9: Logic Metering Screens

60 Loss of Potential Settings

(LOP) Test
• Voltage = 0.75 per unit phase-to-neutral fixed (In this case minimum op-
erate = 0.75 per unit = 0.75 * Vnominal = 0.75 * 66.4 V = 49.8 V)
• I1 Blocking = 10.0 A (positive sequence current that blocks LOP if exceed-
ed)
• 3I0 Blocking = 1.0 A (zero sequence current that blocks LOP if exceeded)

27 VLb (0.75 pu fixed) 168
59 VLb (0.1 pu fixed) 175 171
176 0
dVpos/dt > 3V/cycle 173 174
17ms
dVpos/dt < -3V/cycle
0 5ms
ABS | dIpos/dt | > 0.1A/cycle 169
20ms
12ms
50 Ipos
167
50 3I0
50 ILA (4% I nominal)

172
50 ILB (4% I nominal) 170
50 ILC (4% I nominal)
Figure 6.10: Loss of Potential Logic (60)
60 Test Procedure:
1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering>Logic>Protection>Logic1.
Monitor: 60 Alarm
2 Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the L-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect 3-phase current sources (0.5 A) to the L-PRO terminals (must be
greater than 0.2 A (4% Inominal) to enable due to low set supervision, for
details see for details see Figure 6.10: Loss of Potential Logic (60) on page
6-10).
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0.5 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 0.5 A -120°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 0.5 A 120°
Observe: 60 Alarm = Low
4 Instantaneously reduce single-phase voltage to 48 V or less.
60 Alarm = High
Contact 2 Closed

Testing the LOP I1 Supervision:

1 Restore 3-phase voltages to 66.4 V.
Observe 60 Alarm = Low
Contact 2 = Open
2 Increase balanced 3-phase currents to 10.1 A per phase.
3 Reduce single-phase voltage to 0.
Observe 60 Alarm remains low
Observe Contact 2 remains open
4 Reduce currents to 0.
Testing the LOP 3IO Supervision

1 Restore 3-phase voltages to 66.4 V.
Observe 60 Alarm = Low
Contact 2 = Open
2 Increase any single-phase current to 1.1 A.
3 Reduce single-phase voltage to 0.
Observe 60 Alarm remains low.
Observe Contact 2 remains open.
4 Reduce all sources to 0.
End of 60 test.
21P1 Phase (Zone 1 Single-Phase Under Impedance Test tested as 3-phase fault)
Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line)= 5.9 
• Positive Sequence Line Angle = 80°
• 21P1 = 4.72  (Maximum Reach = 80% of line at maximum torque angle
of 80°)
• Time Delay = 0 (expect 1.3 cycles, 22 ms or less)
• Delta Current Supervision = 7.0 A (minimum phasor difference between
any 2 phases to allow 21P Trip)
21P# - Zab
50 Iab 133
Directional Element
P - Zone #
21P# - Zbc
50 Ibc 134 136 0 TP#
Directional Element 60 137 Out 1
68B 4ms 4ms
21P
21P# - Zca
Generic Phase Distance
50 Ica 135 Logic (# = any zone)
Directional Element
Figure 6.11: Phase Distance Logic (21P)

Preliminary Calculations
Since this is a balanced 3-phase test, there is no Zero Sequence Current, so Z
is calculated as:
V Phase
Z = ---------------
-
I Phase
The minimum 3-phase current required is:

(Remember: I Delta is the phasor difference between any 2-phase currents; add
5% to ensure the Minimum I Delta Supervision Logic is high for this test.).
IDeltaSupervision  105percent 7.0  1.05

Imin = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ------------------------ = 4.24amps
3 3
21P1 Test Procedure

Monitor 21P1 Trip
2 Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the L-PRO terminals.
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect 3-phase current sources (4.24 A lagging voltages by 80°) to the L-
PRO terminals:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 4.24 A -80°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 4.24 A -200°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 4.24 A +40°
Observe 21P1 Trip = Low
4 Simultaneously reduce 3-phase voltages.
At 21.0 to 19.0 V (expect 20.0 V)
21 Trip = High (Note that Contact 1 will probably close earlier than
21-1 Trip going high, because Z2 and Z3 trip elements are mapped to
the same output contact, and the length of time this fault will be ap-
plied.)

Testing the Zone 1 Phase Time Delay

1 Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 1 (202–203).
2 Set timer to start from 3-phase amp current transition (i.e. current off to on).
3 Apply (keep on) balanced 3-phase voltages (20.0 V) to the L-PRO termi-
nals.
Ph A: 330, 20.0 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 20.0 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 20.0 V +120°
Ph N: 333
4 Apply 3-phase currents from 0 to 5.3 A to start the timer (this is 80% of Zone
1 Reach = 64% of the line = 12.4 miles).
Ph A: 300 – 301, 5.3 A -80°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 5.3 A -200°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 5.3 A +40°
Expect operating time less than 1.3 cycles with CCVT algorithm dis-
abled.
End of 21P1 test.
21P2 Phase Zone 2 Phase Under Impedance tested as 2-phase fault

Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line) = 5.9  Pos-
itive Sequence Line Angle (Z1) = 80°
• 21P2= 7.38  (Maximum Reach = 125% of line, 24.25 miles at maximum
torque angle of 80°)
• Time Delay = 400 ms (expect 1.0 to 1.3 cycle additional delay due to in-
herent detection and contact times)
• Delta Current Supervision = 3.0 A (minimum phasor difference between
any 2 phases to allow 21P2 Trip)
This test example shows how to test for a phase-to-phase fault.
Determine the voltage and current quantities required to perform this test.
1 Determine the minimum current required (as per Idelta supervision setting).
2 Determine an appropriate fault voltage to use for the test.
3 Determine the 3-phase voltage phasors required to create the fault voltage.
1 Minimum current required for this test:

I delta Supervision Setting (the phasor difference of 2 phases) = 3.0 A. Cur-
rent is injected into polarity of B-phase and out of polarity of C-phase.
Therefore B-phase and C-phase currents are equal in magnitude but 180°
out of phase.

The minimum delta current required = 3.0 A; add 5% to ensure supervision is

met:
3.0  105percent = 3.2amps
Since B-phase = C-phase, actual minimum current required =
3.2
------- = 1.6amps
2
2 Use the minimum test current to determine what voltage would be appro-
priate for this test.
Equation 5 V faultmin
Z = --------------------------
-
2  I testmin
From Equation 5 we can derive the formula:
V faultmin = Z  2  I testmin
V faultmin = 7.38  2  1.6A = 23.6volts
3 Now determine the 3-phase voltage phasors.

Only B-C fault is shown here, but the same principle applies for A-B or C-
A faults.
Since neutral is not involved in this type of fault, the faulted voltage phasors
collapse toward each other along the phase-to-phase line.
C
120 deg
HEALTHY
VOLTS
FAULT N A
VOLTS
0 deg
-120 deg
B
Figure 6.12: Phasor Representation of an Ideal Phase-to-Phase Fault

The following tables show the voltages to inject for a variety of fault voltage
levels using 115 V secondary phase-to-phase nominal (66.4 V phase-to-neutral
nominal).
A-B Fault
(C-phase voltage = 66.4 V +120°) The resultant angle of A-B voltage always = +30°
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault Volts 103.5 V 92.0 V 80.5 V 69.0 V 57.5 V 46.0 V 34.5 V 23.0 V 11.5 V
Fault Volt Angle 30° 30° 30° 30° 30° 30° 30° 30° 30°
Voltage A=B 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
A Angle -2.7° -5.8° -9.5° -13.9° -19.1° -25.3° -32.5° -40.9° -50.2°
B Angle -117.3° -114.2v -110.5° -106.1° -100.9° -94.7° -87.5° -79.1° -69.8°
B-C Fault
(A phase voltage = 66.4V0°) The resultant angle of B-C voltage always = -90°
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault Volt Angle -90° -90° -90° -90° -90° -90° -90° -90° -90°
Voltage B=C 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
B Angle -122.7° -125.8° -129.5° -133.9° -139.1° -145.3° -152.5° -160.9° -170.2°
C Angle 122.7° 125.8° 129.5° 133.9° 139.1° 145.3° 152.5° 160.9° 170.2°
C-A Fault
(B phase voltage = 66.4V -120°) The resultant angle of C-A voltage always = +150°
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault Volt Angle 150° 150° 150° 150° 150° 150° 150° 150° 150°
Voltage C=A 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
C Angle 117.3° 114.2° 110.5° 106.1° 100.9° 94.7° 87.5° 79.1° 69.8°
A Angle 2.7° 5.8° 9.5° 13.9° 19.1° 25.3° 32.5° 40.9° 50.2°

For this B-C test a minimum fault voltage of 23.6 V is required as calculated
in the table, “B-C Fault” on page 6-15. Select the next highest voltage. In this
case 34.5 V (70% reduction) is used.
The following formulae were used to calculate the voltages for the tables (they
may be used for any other desired fault voltage): Test voltage magnitude:
Equation 3 2 2
V fault
 ------------- V nominal
+  ---------------------
 2   2 
Note: Vfault = phase-to-phase fault voltage and Vnominal = phase-to-neutral

nominal voltage.
Test Phase Angle

Offset the nominal phase angles toward the other faulted phase angle by:
Equation 4 V fault
60 – atan  ---------------------
 V nominal
Example of this calculation using the 70% voltage reduction from the B-C fault
table: Phase B-C voltage angle = -90° with respect to A-N voltage phasor.
Fault Voltage = 70% reduction of phase-to-phase nominal
= 115V –  – 90  –  115V + – 90  70percent  =  34.5V  – 90  
Faulted Test Voltage Magnitudes = 2 2

 34.5
----------  66.4
----------
 2  + 2  = 1399.8 = 37.4V
Faulted Phase Angle =

34.5
60 – atan  ---------- = 60 – 27.5 = 32.5
 66.4
For B-C fault adjust Phase B angle toward Phase C angle and adjust Phase C
angle toward Phase B angle:
B Phase Angle = -120° - 32.5° = -152.5°
C Phase Angle = +120 + 32.5° = 152.5°
So,
A Phase Phasor = Unfaulted = 66.4 V 0°
B Phase Phasor = Faulted = 37.4 V -152.5°
C Phase Phasor = Faulted = 37.4 V +152.5°

Connecting the Test Source for B-C Fault:
AC Current AC Voltages
+
+
+
+ +
330 331 332 333
A B C L-PRO A B C N
Main Current Inputs Main Voltage Inputs
Figure 6.13: AC Connections to L-PRO for B-C (21P) Test
In summary for this example, inject Phase B to Phase C fault:

Line Impedance = 7.38 
Line Angle = 80°
Fault Voltage = 34.5 V -90° using the calculated voltage phasors
Fault Current = greater than 1.6 A (-90°- 80°) = greater than 1.6 A -170°
21P2 Test Procedure

Monitor the following element for pickup: 21P2 Pickup.
2 Apply the following 3-phase voltages to the L-PRO main ac volts terminals:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 37.4 V -152.5°
Ph C: 332, 37.4 V +152.5°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect variable single-phase current source (lagging phase-to-phase fault
voltage by 80°) to the L-PRO main line current terminals (Jumper Termi-
nals 303 & 305):
Ph B-C: 302 – 304, 1.5 A -170°
Observe 21P2 Alarm = Low
4 Increase current.
At 2.23 to 2.45 A (expect 2.34 A):
21P2 Alarm = High
5 Turn off voltage and current sources.
End of 21P2 test.

21N2 Ground Zone 2 Phase-to-Neutral Under Impedance

Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line) = 5.9 
• Positive Sequence Line Angle (Z1) = 80°
• 21N2 = 7.38  (Maximum Reach = 125% of line at maximum torque angle
of 80°) compensated as per 21N calculations to: 11.58  76.5°
• Resistive Component compensated to: 9.41  -3.5°
• Time Delay = 0 (expect 1.3 cycles, 22 ms or less)
• 3I0 Current Supervision = 1.5 A (minimum zero sequence current to allow
21N2 to operate)
• I Phase Current Supervision = 1.5 A (minimum phase current to allow 21N2
to operate)
21N# - Zan
50 Ia
138
50N 3IO
Directional Element N - Zone #
21N# - Zbn
50 Ib
139 141 0 TN#
50N 3IO 142 Out 1
Directional Element 60 4ms 0
21N# - Zcn
21N
50 Ic Generic Phase Distance
140 Logic (# = any zone)
50N 3IO
Directional Element
Figure 6.14: Ground Distance Logic (21N)
This test demonstrates testing a single line (Phase A) to a ground fault.
Preliminary calculations
Since this is a single-phase test, use the compensated impedance value calcu-
lated above; the calculated Z is:
V fault
Z fault = -------------
I fault
The minimum single-phase current required is:

(Remember: Testing single-phase, so need to exceed the greater of I phase and
3IO supervision settings; add 5% to ensure the minimum supervision logic is
high for this test.):
I min = Greater of Phase and 3IO Supervision  105percent = 1.5  1.05 = 1.58A
This element has been set for quadrilateral characteristic.

21N2 Reactive Test Procedure

Monitor: 21N2 Pickup
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect single-phase current source to the L-PRO terminals.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.58 A -76.5°
Observe 21N2 Pickup = Low
4 Reduce Phase A voltage.
At 17.4 to 19.2 V (expect 18.3 V):
21N2 Pickup = High (After 400 ms: 21N2 Trip = High)
21N2 Resistive Test Procedure

Monitor: 21N2 Pickup
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect single -phase current source to the L-PRO terminals.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 1.58 A +3.5°
Observe 21N2 Pickup = Low
4 Reduce Phase A voltage.
At 15.6 to 14.2 V (expect 14.9 V).
21N2 Pickup = High
After 400 ms: 21N2 Trip = High
Testing the Zone 2 Neutral Time Delay

1 Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 1 (202 – 203).
2 Set timer to start from single-phase current transition (i.e. current off to on).
3 Apply the following 3-phase voltages to the L-PRO terminals.
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333

4 Apply single-phase current from 0 to 6.0 A to start the timer (95% of Zone
2 Reach = 119% of the line = 23.1 miles).
Ph A: 300 – 301, 6.0 A -76.5°
Expected operate time = (400 ms + 1.0 to 1.3 cycle) = 417 ms (± 2.5%)
Note: The zone timer starts when the fault is detected; the detection time +
inherent contact time = approximately 1.0 to 1.3 cycles after fault inception.
Testing Other Zones

You can test all other zones (21P3-4) and (21N1 and 21N3-4) using the same
process as the 21P1, 21P2 and 21N2 zones, except that you need to substitute
the impedance and timing settings for those zones.
End of 21 tests.
Weak Infeed Test Weak Infeed tripping operates on 4 basic conditions:

1 Low Positive Sequence Voltage (27V1) or High Neutral Voltage (59V0)
2 No Zone 2 or Zone 4 reverse element picked up.
3 Loss of Potential (60) element dropped out
4 Permissive trip received from the remote end
21-2 6ms
108
21-4R TWD1
60 110 0
111
3ms TWD3
TWD2
20ms
Receiver
0 112
Weak
27 V1 Infeed
113 Enable
59 V0
Switch
Scheme Scheme
Trip Send
Figure 6.15: Weak Infeed Logic
For this test apply 0 voltage and 0 current to the relay with no prefault. This
causes the first 3 conditions to be met: (27V1, NOT (Zone 2 OR Zone 4R),
NOT Loss of Potential).
In this case a Virtual Input is set up to simulate the Permissive Trip Receive
contact via ProLogic.

Figure 6.16: Scheme Selector Settings (Offliner)
Weak Infeed Test Procedure

1 Activating this Virtual Input by accessing the L-PRO Terminal Mode Util-
ities>Maintenance>Control Virtual Inputs.
2 Press the <Enter> or the <Space> keys to scroll Virtual Inputs to the Input
Name “PerTripRec Simulate” (Virtual Input 13).
3 Press the <Arrow>key to activate the action section. Select the Pulse On
option.
4 Press the <F2> Key to execute the “PerTripRec Simulate” as shown in the
following screen shot.
Figure 6.17: Virtual Input Control (HyperTerminal)
Observe Relay Target: “POTT Trip (WI): 0.0 mi.

Note: The 0.0 mi indicates that there was 0 impedance measured due to 0 line
voltage being applied.
End of Weak Infeed test.

Dead Line Pickup Dead Line Pickup operates on 3 basic conditions:

Test
1 Zero Positive Sequence Polarizing Voltage (27Vpos) for at least 2 seconds
prior to line energization
2 Zero Current (less than 4% of nominal) prior to the application of the fault
(i.e. line goes from “dead” to energized state: 50ILa, b, c)
3 Instantaneous Phase or Neutral Overcurrent settings (within the Dead Line
Pickup screen) are exceeded within 200 ms of line energization
2 sec
27 Vpos
0
50ILa RMS
4% Inominal 200ms
RMS fixed 50ILb RMS 290 10ms
295 Out 9
50ILc RMS
50ILa RMS
50ILb RMS 50P
291
50ILc RMS 50N
50 3IO
293
IL2a / IL1a
2nd Harmonic
Blocking IL2b / IL1b 292 294
IL2c / IL1c
2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable
Figure 6.18: Dead Line Pickup Logic
Figure 6.19: Dead Line Pickup Settings (Offliner)
Dead Line Pickup Test Procedure

1 Apply 0 voltage to the relay voltage inputs.
2 Instantaneously step single-phase current from 0 to 0.95 A to:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0.95 A any°
Observe target “Dead Line Pickup on A”.
End of Dead Line Pickup test.

68 Out of Step Test (Set to trip for this test.)
Settings
• Outer Right Blinder = 17 
• Outer Left Blinder = -17 
• Inner Right Blinder = 13 
• Inner Left Blinder = -13 
• Swing timer = 1.0 second
• I1 Supervision (positive sequence current) = 3.0 A
• 3I0 Supervision = 1.0 A
Note: Out of Step Blinders are Positive Sequence Impedance Quantities.
68 Inner Alarm Out 13

Zpos 68 Outer Alarm
Out 12
Enable Setting
TB
164
50 Ipos
163 0 68 Block
50 3I0 165 Out 2
68 Trip
60
Figure 6.20: Out of Step Logic (68)
Preliminary Calculations
Because this is a Positive Sequence Impedance, perform this test as balanced
3-phase, since this is the easiest way to obtain positive sequence. The calculat-
ed Z is:
V phase
Z = ---------------
-
I phase
The minimum 3-phase current required must be greater than the I1 Supervision
Setting (3.0 A).
Add 5% to ensure that the supervision is met:
Imin = I1supervision  105percent = 3.0  1.05 = 3.15A
68 Outer Right Test Procedure

Monitor:
68 OutBlinder Alarm
Contact 12 with an ohmmeter
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333

3 Connect 3-phase current sources (3.15 A in phase with voltages) to the L-

PRO terminals.:Ph A: 300 – 301, 3.15 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 3.15 A -120°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 3.15 A +120°
Observe 68 OutBlinder Alarm = Low
Contact 12 = Open
4 Simultaneously increase (ramp up) 3-phase currents.
At 3.72 to 4.10 A (expect 3.91A):
68 OutBlinder Alarm = High
Contact 12 = Closed
End of 68 Outer test.
68 Inner Left Test Procedure

1 Terminal Mode access relay Metering>Logic>Protection>Logic1.
Monitor:
68 InnBlinder Alarm.
Output Contact 13 with an ohmmeter.
2 Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the L-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
3 Connect 3-phase current sources (3.15 A 180° from voltages) to the L-
PRO terminals.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 3.15 A 180°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 3.15 A +60°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 3.15 A -60°
Observe 68 InnBlinder Alarm = Low
Contact 13 = Open
4 Simultaneously increase (ramp up) 3-phase currents.
At 4.86 to 5.36 A (expect 5.11 A):
68 InnBlinder Alarm = High
Contact 13 = Closed

Testing the 68 Swing Timer Delay

1 Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 2 (204 – 205).
2 Test at impedance between Inner and Outer Right Blinders = 15 0°
3 Set timer to start from 3-phase current transition (i.e. current off to on).
4 Apply (keep on) balanced 3-phase voltages (66.4 V) to the L-PRO termi-
nals.
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
5 Apply 3-phase currents from 0 to 4.43 A to start the timer.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 4.43 A 0°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 4.43 A -120°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 4.43 A 120°
Expect operating time 1.0 second + inherent 1.0 to 1.3 cycle detection time.
Observe target: “68 Out Of Step: Trip”.
End of 68 Swing Timer test.
Change Setting For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file you must change to
Group Setting Group 2.
1 In Service mode access Utilities>Maintenance>Control Virtual Inputs.
2 Use the <Enter> key to scroll Input Name to “Switch to SG2”.
3 Cursor over to Action and select “Pulse On”.
4 Press <F2> to execute this command; the Active Setting Group will be-
come Group 2.
Figure 6.21: Change Setting Groups via Virtual Inputs (HyperTerminal)
5 Confirm the Active Setting Group in Settings>Active Group.

Note: you can also change the Active Setting Group in this screen.

Figure 6.22: Group Logic Metering (HyperTerminal)
27 Undervoltage Settings
Test
• Main: AND (3-Phase Undervoltage)
• Auxiliary: AND (Single-Phase Undervoltage; Only 1 phase is connected)
• Main and Aux Pickup: 30 V
• Time Delay: 0.01 second
27 Va main RMS
27 Vb main RMS 300
T
27 Vc main RMS Out 14
27 Main Undervoltage 0
301
3 Phases Connected
27 Va aux RMS
27 Vb aux RMS 302
27 Vc aux RMS
T
Out 13
27 Aux Undervoltage 0
303
1 Phase Connected
Figure 6.23: Undervoltage Logic (27)

27 Test Procedure
1 Terminal Mode access relay Metering>Logic>Protection>Logic2.
Monitor:
27 Main U/V
27 Aux U/V
Monitor Output Contacts:
13 (27 Aux Trip)
14 (27 Main Trip)
Ph A: 324 and 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 327 and 333
Observe:
27 Main U/V = Low
27 Aux U/V = Low
3 Reduce A Phase voltage.
At 31.0 to 29.0 V (expect 30 V):
27 Aux U/V = High
Contact 13 closed
27 Main U/V remains Low
Contact 14 open

4 With A Phase voltage still reduced, reduce B and C phase volts:

At 31 to 29 V (expect 30 V):
27 Aux U/V = High
27 Main U/V = High
Contact 14 closed
End of 27 test.
59 Overvoltage Test Settings

• Main: AND (3-Phase Overvoltage)
• Auxiliary: OR (Single-Phase Overvoltage – 1 phase connected)
• Main and Aux Pickup: 72 V
59 Va main MS
59 Vb main RMS 296
T
59 Vc main RMS Out 14
59 Main Undervoltage 0
297
3 Phases Connected
59 Va aux RMS
59 Vb aux RMS 298
59 Vc aux RMS
T
Out 13
59 Aux Undervoltage 0
299
1 Phase Connected
Figure 6.24: Overvoltage Logic (59)
59 Test Procedure
Monitor:
59 Main O/V
59 Aux O/V
Monitor contacts:
Output 13 (59 Aux Trip)
Output 14 (59 Main Trip)
Ph A: 324 & 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 327 and 333
Observe:
59 Main O/V = Low
59 Aux O/V = Low

3 Increase A Phase voltage:

At 70.0 to 74.0 V (expect 72 V):
59 Aux O/V = High
Contact 13 = Closed
59 Main O/V remains Low
Contact 14 = Open
4 With A Phase voltage still increased, increase B and C phase volts.
At 70 to 74 V (expect 72 V):
59 Aux O/V = High
59 Main O/V = High
Contact 14 = Closed
End of 59 test.
50N/51N Neutral Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test

Overcurrent Test
Settings
• Both Directional
• 50N Pickup = 10.0 A
• 51N Pickup = 1.0 A
• Time Curve = IEEE Moderately Inverse
A = 0.0103
B = 0.0228
p = 0.02
TMS = 3.0
50N directional control if Directional, T must be greater than 10 ms

T
286 0
Out 6
50 3IO
5ms
Alarm
0
Timer is active, only if it's directional
51N directional control

287 Out 7
51 3IO
Figure 6.25: Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic (50N/51N)

50N and 51N Test Procedure

Note: with 0 voltage applied, the unit becomes non-directional (i.e. picks up in
both forward and reverse directions).
Monitor:
51N Alarm
Output Contact 6 (50N Trip)
2 Apply single-phase current to the L-PRO terminals as follows:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0.5 A
3 Slowly ramp the current up.
At 0.95 to 1.05 A (expect 1.0 A):
51N Alarm = High
4 Continue to raise current.
At 9.5 to 10.5 A (expect 10.0 A):
50N Trip = High
Contact 6 = Closed
5 Turn current off.
51N Alarm = Low
50N Trip = Low
Timing Test
1 Monitor (Timer Stop) on Output Contact 7.
2 Set timer start from single-phase 0.0 A to 4.00 A transition (this equates to
4x pickup).
Time Delay
A
= TMS  B + ----------------------------------- 0.0103- = 3  0.0228 + 0.0103
- = 3  0.0228 + ------------------- ---------------- = 1.168s
 I multiple  – 1
p
4
0.02
–1 0.0281
3 Inject fault.
Observe Relay Target: “51N Trip”
End of 50N/51N test.

50/51 Phase (Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent) Test

Overcurrent Test
Settings
• Only 51 Directional
• 50 Pickup = 15.0 A
• 51 Pickup = 1.5 A
• Time Curve = IEC Very Inverse
A = 13.5
B = 0.00
p = 1.0
TMS = 0.5
50P Directional Control If Directional, T must be greater than 10 ms

T
284 0
Out 10
ILa RMS Select Maximum
ILb RMS Phase current for
50 Element
ILc RMS 51 Element
5ms
Alarm
0
Timer is active, only if it' directional
285 Out 11
51P Directional Control
Figure 6.26: Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic (50/51)
50 and 51 Test Procedure

1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering>Logic>Protection/Logic1.
Monitor:
51 Alarm.
Output Contact 10 (50 Trip).
2 Apply single-phase current to the L-PRO terminals.
Ph A: 300 – 301, 0.5 A
3 Slowly ramp up the current.
At 1.43 to 1.58 A (expect 1.5 A):
51 Alarm = High
4 Continue to raise current.
At 14.3 to 15.8 A (expect 15 A):
50 Trip = High
Contact 10 = Closed
5 Turn current off.
51 Alarm = Low
50 Trip = Low

51 Timing Test
4x pickup).
Time Delay
A
= TMS  B + ----------------------------------- 13.5- = 0.5  0.00 + 13.5
- = 0.5  0.00 + ------------- ---------- = 2.25s
p 1
4 –1 3
3 Inject fault.
Observe Relay Target: “51 Trip on A”
51 Directional Test
Settings
• 51 Settings as above
• Line Angle = 80° (i.e. current lags voltage by 80°)
Note: Operating Range = ± 90° from line angle
51P Forward
266
51P Reverse
278 51P directional control
267
Non-directional
50P Forward
268
279 50P directional control
50P Reverse
269
Non-directional
Vpos Memory 51N Forward

FORWARD
270
ILpos REVERSE 280 51N directional control
51N Reverse
264 271
59 Vpos Main (2 volts RMS fixed)
Non-directional
50N Forward
265 Non-directional 272
50 ILpos (4% I nominal RMS fixed)
50N Reverse
281 50N directional control
273
Non-directional
46-51 Forward
274
282 46-51 directional control
46-51 Reverse
275
Non-directional
46-50 Forward
276
46-50 Reverse
283 46-50 directional control
277
Non-directional
Figure 6.27: Directional Element Logic

51 Directional Test Procedure

Monitor: 51 Pickup Alarm
2 Apply single-phase polarizing voltage to:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V 0°
3 Apply single-phase current at line angle to:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 2.0 A -80°
Observe 51 Pickup Alarm = High
4 Slowly ramp the current phase angle in negative direction (i.e. more lag):
At -165° to -175° (expect -170°):
51 Pickup Alarm = Low
5 Restore current to line angle (-80°):
Observe 51 Pickup Alarm = High
6 Slowly ramp the current phase angle in positive direction (i.e. less lag):
At +5° to +15° (expect +10°):
51 Pickup Alarm = Low
7 Turn off voltage and current sources.
End of 50/51 test.

46-50/46-51 Negative Settings

Sequence
Overcurrent Test • Directional
• 46-51 Pickup = 1.0 A
• Time Curve = IEEE Extremely Inverse
A = 5.64
B = 0.02434
p=2
TMS = 3.0
46-50 Directional Control If Directional, T must be greater than 10 ms

T
288 0
Out 8
50 I2
5ms
Alarm
0
46-51 Directional Control

289 Out 9
51 I1
Figure 6.28: Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic (46-50/
46-51)
Note that positive sequence current (50ILpos), 4% of nominal current is nec-

essary to enable the directional element. This supervision can be seen on OR
265, for details see for details see Figure 6.27: Directional Element Logic on
page 6-32.
For this test inject only single-phase current. This method introduces an equal
proportion of positive and negative sequence current. This assures that there is
sufficient positive sequence current to enable directional control of the nega-
tive sequence element, if a polarizing voltage is also applied.
Positive sequence (I1), Negative Sequence (I2), Zero Sequence (3I0) are cal-
culated by using the following equations:
2
I A + aI B + a I C
Equation 5 I1 = ------------------------------------
- where a = 1 120°
3
2
I A + a I B + aI C
Equation 6 I2 = ------------------------------------
- where a = 1 120°
3
Equation 7 3IO = I A + I B + I C

Using Equation 6 notice that there is a need to triple the pickup setting current
on one phase to obtain the pickup value of negative sequence current.
For example injecting 1.0 A on Phase A only (Phase B = Phase C = 0), and with
no voltage applied, the 46-51 element becomes non-directional even though
the setting is directional:
2
1 + a 0 + a0 1
I2 = ------------------------------- = --- = 0.33A
3 3
46-51 Test Procedure

Monitor: 46-51 Alarm
Ph A: 300 – 301, 2.5 A
3 Slowly ramp the current up:
At 2.9 to 3.1 A (expect 3.0 A):
46-51 Pickup Alarm = High
4 Turn current source off.
46-51 Timing Test

4x pickup).
Time Delay
A 5.64 5.64
= TMS  B + ------------------------------------ = 3.0  0.02434 + -------------- = 3.0  0.02434 + ---------- = 1.201s
p 2
4 –1 15
3 Inject fault.
Observe Relay Target: “46-51 Trip”
End of 46-51 test.

Directional Element (see OR 265, for details see Figure 6.27: Directional Element Logic on page 6-
Positive Sequence 32)
Current Supervision
Threshold (50ILpos) Settings
Test
• Directional
• 50ILpos (Positive Sequence (I1) Low Set = 0.2 A fixed)
• 46-50 Pickup = 5.0 A
46-50 Directional Control If Directional, T must be greater than 10 ms

T
288 0
Out 8
50 I2
5ms
Alarm
0
46-51 Directional Control

289 Out 9
51 I1
Figure 6.29: Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic (46-50/
46-51)
Test Calculations
The L-PRO directional element has a fixed positive sequence current setting of
4% of Inominal that is used to supervise the directional control. If the positive
sequence current falls below 4% of Inominal, the directional control becomes
non-directional. So, for directional control of the 46 element, you require:
Negative Sequence Current (I2) greater than pickup AND Positive Se-
quence Current (I1) greater than or equal to 0.2 A (4% Inominal).
For this test inject a Reverse Negative Sequence fault:
With the I1 Directional Supervision threshold not exceeded, the directional
unit is disabled, therefore the directional element will be non-directional.
This means that the 46 element is able to operate in the reverse direction as
well as in the forward direction.
When the I1 Directional Supervision is exceeded, the 46 drops out as it has
now become Directional (forward) only.
Testing is accomplished by applying 3-phase balanced I2 quantities sufficient
to pickup the 46 element and then increasing the magnitude of any single-
phase.
For example, for our 46-50 pickup of 5.0 A, use I2 of 5.1 A. This is sufficient
I2 magnitude to solidly pickup the 46-50 element at the line angle. Note, that
the line angle is the Positive Sequence Forward Direction but is the Negative
Sequence Reverse Direction:
IA = 5.1 A -80°
IB = 5.1 A +40°
IC = 5.1 A +160°

The symmetrical components using Equations 5 to 7:

I1 = 0
I2 = 5.1 A -80°
3I0 = 0
Now vary single-phase current to obtain sufficient I1 to enable the directional
element (0.2 A).
Vary Phase A for this test.
Redefine the symmetrical components to determine test quantities.

Because IA will change, call it Inew.
IB and IC are equal and do not change so call them Iold.
I new – I old
I1 = ---------------------------
-
3
IA + IB + IC I new + 2 I old
I2 = ------------------------------------
- or I2 = ----------------------------------
-
3 3
3IO = I new – I old
Use the I1 formula to calculate Inew because we know the required value of I1
(0.2 A).
Iold = 5.1 A (I2 pickup plus margin)
I1= |Inew - Iold|/3
0.2 = |Inew - Iold|/3
Inew = 0.6 + 5.1
Inew = 5.7 A
Directional Element 50ILpos Threshold Test Procedure

Monitor: 46-50 Trip
2 Apply single-phase polarizing voltage to L-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V 0°
3 Apply 3-phase negative sequence currents to L-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 300 – 301, 5.1A -80°
Ph B: 302 – 303, 5.1A +40°
Ph C: 303 – 304, 5.1A +160°
Observe 46-50 Trip = High
4 Slowly ramp up Phase A current to activate Directional Control:
At 5.67 to 5.73 A (expect 5.7 A):
46-50 Trip = Low
5 Turn currents off.
End of Directional 50ILpos Threshold test.

50BF (Breaker Fail) Settings

and 50LS (Low Set
Overcurrent) Tests Main:
• 50LS Pickup: 1.0 A,
• Time Delay: 0.00 seconds
• 50BF Time Delay 1: 5.0 seconds
Auxiliary:
• 50LS Pickup: 1.0 A
• Time Delay: 0.00 seconds
Input 3:
(50LS used with Virtual Input 3 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 3)
Input 4:
(50LS used with Virtual Input 4 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 4)
Main and Aux. Breaker Fails are set to be initiated via the Output Matrix from
50LS Pickup (1.0 A Main and Aux and 0 time delay). Note: Requires a mini-
mum of 0.2 A on any phase to arm Breaker Fail.
Breaker Failure Initiator (from Output Matrix) T1

204 Out 1
0
50 I1a (4% I nominal RMS fixed)
50 I1b (4% I nominal RMS fixed) 205
T2
50 I1c (4% I nominal RMS fixed)
Out 2
0
Figure 6.30: Main Breaker Fail Logic (50BF)
50BF and 50LS Test Procedure

1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering>Logic>Protection/Logic2.
Monitor:
50LS Main
Output Contact 1 (50BF Main-1 Trip: A)
Output Contact 2 (50BF Main-2 Trip: A)
Ph A: 300-301, 0.8 A

3 Slowly ramp the current up, at a rate of about 0.1 A per second:
At 0.9 to 1.1 A (expect 1.0 A):
50LS Main = High
5 seconds later, Output Contact 1 = Closed (50BF Main-1 Trip)
After an additional 5 seconds Output Contact 2 = Closed (50BF
Main-2 Trip)
4 Turn current off.
50LS Main = Low
Contacts 1 and 2 = Open
5 The same 50BF procedure may be followed on the auxiliary input by inject-
ing current into relay auxiliary current input, Terminals 306-307 and mon-
itor Contacts 3 and 4.
Testing Inputs 3 and 4 50LS Function

Inputs 3 and 4 50LS functions are used in a Breaker Fail Application using Pro-
Logic.
The following screen shot shows the Logic being used to make a Breaker Fail
application from the 50LS using ProLogic.
ProLogic 1: This boolean equation used to initiate and operate as a Breaker Fail
for 52-3 (Input 3). Current above the 50LS threshold arms one input of the
AND gate. The initiate in this case is provided by Virtual Input 3 which will
latch until the current drops below the 50LS threshold.
Note: ProLogic 2 (not shown) is for 52-4 (Input 4).
Figure 6.31: Breaker Fail Created Using ProLogic

Input 3 Breaker Fail Test Procedure

1 Apply 0.31 A to L-PRO Terminals 312 – 313.
2 In Terminal Mode Service level access Utilities>Maintenance>Control
Virtual Inputs.
Scroll to VI3 “Init BF 52-3”.
Pulse On.
Observe after 1 Second: Target “Breaker Fail 52-3: PL1”
3 Reduce current to zero.
4 Apply the same process to Input 4, Terminals 318 – 319, using VI4 “Init BF
52-4”.
End of 50BF and 50LS tests.
For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file, you must change to
Setting Group 3.
1 In Service mode access Utilities>Maintenance>Control Virtual Inputs.
2 Use the <Enter> key to scroll Input Name to “Switch to SG3”.
3 Cursor over to Action and select Pulse On.
4 Press <F2> to execute this command; the Active Setting Group now is
Group 3.
Figure 6.32: Control Virtual Inputs (HyperTerminal)
5 Confirm the Active Setting Group in Metering>Logic>Setting Group.

(Note: Active Setting Group cannot be changed in this screen).

Figure 6.33: Group Logic Metering Screen. Confirm the Active Setting Group
81 Overfrequency Settings
and Underfrequency
Test • 81-1 Pickup = 60.5 Hz Fixed Rate (50.5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
• 81-1 Time Delay = 0.5 second
• 81-2 Pickup = 59.5 Hz Fixed Rate (49.5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
• 81-3 Pickup = +1.0 Hz/second
• 81-4 Pickup = -1.0 Hz/second
Requires minimum of 0.25 per unit positive sequence voltage (fixed setting) to
enable the 81 element.
81-1 Freq or Df/Dt

T
81-1 Frequency 200 ms 304 Out 8
Vpos. > 0.25 PU 0
0
81-2 Freq or Df/Dt

81-2 Frequency T
200 ms 305 Out 8
Vpos. > 0.25 PU 0
0
81-3 Freq or Df/Dt

81-3 Frequency T
200 ms 306 Out 9
Vpos. > 0.25 PU 0
0
81-4 Freq or Df/Dt
81-4 Frequency T
200 ms 307 Out 9
Vpos. > 0.25 PU 0
0
Figure 6.34: Over/Under/Rate of Change of Frequency Logic (81)

81 Fixed Rate Test Procedure

Monitor:
81-1 Trip
Output Contact: 8
2 Apply single-phase nominal voltage to:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V @ 60 Hz (@ 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
81-1 = Low
81-2 = Low
3 Ramp up the voltage frequency.
At 60.499 to 60.501 Hz (50.499 to 50.501 Hz for 50 Hz relay):
81-1 = High
81-2 = Low
Contact 8 = Closed
4 Ramp down the voltage frequency.
At 59.501 to 59.499 Hz (49.501 to 49.499 Hz for 50 Hz Relay):
81-1 = Low
81-2 = High
Contact 8 = Closed
5 Turn voltage source off.
81 Rate of Change (df/dt) Test Procedure

Monitor:
81-3 Trip
Contact: 9
2 Apply single-phase nominal voltage to the L-PRO terminals:
Ph A: 330 – 333, 66.4 V @ 60 Hz (50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
3 Ramp the frequency at a rate of +0.99 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
Contact 9 = Open
4 Restore nominal frequency.
5 Ramp the frequency at a rate of +1.01 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = High
81-4 = Low
Contact 9 = Closed


7 Ramp the frequency at a rate of -0.99 Hz/s of a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
Contact 9 = Open
9 Ramp the frequency at a rate of -1.01 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = High
Contact 9 = Closed
81 Timing Test Procedure

1 Monitor (Timer Stop) on Output Contact 8 (81-1).
2 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66.4 V @ 60 Hz to 60.6 Hz
transition.
Expect time delay of 500 ms + approximately 1.5 cycle detection time.
3 Apply the frequency shift.
Confirm the expected time delay.
Target “81-1”
4 Move (Timer Stop) to Output Contact 9 (81-2).
5 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66.4 V @ 60 Hz to 59.4 Hz
transition.
Expect time delay of 500 ms + approximately 1.5 cycle detection time.
6 Apply the frequency shift.
Confirm the expected time delay.
Target “81-2”
End of 81 test.

25/27/59 Sync Check Note: Three or four voltage sources are required for this test.
Test
The L-PRO will create the positive sequence sync check voltage out of the sin-
gle-phase auxiliary voltage input depending on which phase is injected.
Settings
• Maximum voltage: 70 V sec. (Maximum Positive Sequence voltage)
• Minimum voltage: 40 V sec. (Minimum Positive Sequence voltage)
• Angle Difference: 20 degrees
• Time Delay: 200 milliseconds
• Dead Main Live Aux. (DMLA): Enable
• Live Main Dead Aux. (LMDA): Enable
• Dead Main Dead Aux. (DMDA): Enable
27 Vmain (Positive Seq)

208
27 Vaux (Positive seq)
59 Vmain (Positive seq) 210 T
209 211
59 Vsync (Positive seq) 0
|VmainAngle-VauxAngle| < Setting

25 C (Sync Check) Enabled
52a Main
Dead Main-Live Sync Enabled 212 213 Out 10
52a Aux
27 Vmain (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed) 214
59 Vsync (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed) (+)
Live Main-Dead Sync Enabled 25ms
217
59 Vmain (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed) 215 216 0
27 Vsync (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed)

Dead Main-Dead Sync Enabled
27 Vmain (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed) 218

27 Vsync (Positive Seq, 20 V Fixed)
Figure 6.35: Synchronism Check Logic (25/27/59)
Sync Check Test Procedure

Monitor:
25/27/59 Sync Check
Output Contact: 10
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves DMDA with no voltage
applied)
2 Apply voltages to the relay main voltage input terminals sufficient to create
Vpos of 66.4 V.
If only 3 voltage sources are available:
Ph A: 330, 99.6 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 99.6 V -120°
Ph C: 332, not applicable
Ph N: 333

OR
If 4 voltage sources are available:
Ph A: 330, 66.4 V 0°
Ph B: 331, 66.4 V -120°
Ph C: 332, 66.4 V +120°
Ph N: 333
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves LMDA with only line volt-
age applied)
3 Turn voltage off.
4 Apply single-phase nominal voltage (66.4 V) to the relay auxiliary voltage
input terminals.
Ph A: 324, 66.4 V 25°
Ph N: 327
(Short and ground unused Terminals 325 and 326)
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves DMLA with only bus-
voltage applied)
5 Apply both sets of voltages to main and auxiliary inputs as detailed above.
Observe:
25/27/59 Sync Check = Low
6 Simultaneously rotate the auxiliary voltage phase angle in lagging direction
(i.e. toward 0°).
At 21° to 19° difference (expect 20°):
25/27/59 = High
Contact 10 = Closed (after 200 ms)
7 Slowly ramp down the auxiliary voltage magnitude.
At 41.0 to 39.0 V (expect 40 V):
25/27/59 = Low
Contact 10 = Open
8. Slowly ramp up the auxiliary voltage magnitude.
At 69.0 to 71.0 V (expect 70 V):
25/27/59 = Low
Contact 10 = Open
8 Turn all voltage sources off.
End of Sync Check test.

79 Recloser Test Settings

• Number of Shots: 4
• First Reclose (T1): 2.0 seconds
• Second Reclose (T2): 4.0 seconds
• Third Reclose (T3): 6.0 seconds
• Fourth Reclose (T4): 8.0 seconds
• Close time (Tp): 0.3 second
• Lockout Reset (TD): 12 seconds
• Initiate Reset (TDI): 1.0 second
• Sync Control: Enable
• Mode: Main then Aux.
• Block Reset (TDB): 1.0 seconds
• Follower Time (TF): 8.0 seconds
• Breaker Out Of Service (TC): 200 seconds
• Follower Sequencer: Close after Recloser Follower Time
• Main Breaker: EI1 [Breaker Status a]
• Aux Breaker: EI2 [Breaker Status a]
The following procedure allows you to test the Main and Auxiliary 4-shot re-
closers, ending in 79 lockout.
The only test equipment required for this test is a 125 Vdc supply.
Output Contact 5 of the L-PRO relay is used to simulate the Main Breaker ‘a’
Contact and Output Contact 6 is used to simulate the Aux Breaker ‘a’ Contact.
The Main Breaker Status is monitored by External Input 1; and Auxiliary
Breaker Status is monitored by External Input 2.
Output 7 is used to simulate a protection operation. It supplies a trip command
via External Input 3 and initiates the 79 operation.
Connect a 125 Vdc supply to the L-PRO relay output and input terminals as
shown in for details see Figure 6.36: Test Connections for 4-Shot Recloser Test
on page 6-46.
+
OUT 5 210 OUT 6 212 OUT 7 214
125 (52a) (52a) (Trip)

211 213 215
Vdc
100 102 104
EI1 EI2 EI3
_ Main Aux Trip and
Breaker Breaker 79
101 103 105
Status Status Initiate
Figure 6.36: Test Connections for 4-Shot Recloser Test

ProLogic equations are used to activate and supervise the 79 test functions.
Normally each of these ProLogic equations would not be set to target, but for
this type of acceptance testing, it’s convenient for seeing operations as they
happen.
Details of ProLogic Equations for this 79 Test Example

ProLogic 1: This equation activates the reclose sequence. It sets the breaker
status (closes Out 5) via ProLogic 3.
Figure 6.37: Simulating Main Breaker Close Command using Virtual Input in ProLogic
ProLogic 2: This equation is used to reset the Main Breaker Status via ProLog-
ic 3 (Opens Out 5).
Figure 6.38: Breaker Status Reset using ProLogic (Ext. Input 3 via Output Contact 5)

ProLogic 3: This equation is set from ProLogic 1 (Main Breaker Close Com-
mand) OR ProLogic 9 (Main Breaker Reclose). (Note that ProLogic 9 is
mapped to Out 14, so Out 14 is used to indirectly provide ProLogic 9 availabil-
ity to ProLogic 1 through 8.) ProLogic 9 changes the Main Breaker Status con-
tact (Out 5) and apply a trip signal via ProLogic 4. Reset occurs when ProLogic
2 (Breaker Status Reset) is activated.
Figure 6.39: Main Breaker Status
ProLogic 4: This equation applies the External Trip (Closes Out 7), 10 seconds
after the Breaker Status (ProLogic 3) goes high (i.e. Main Breaker Status =
Closed).
Figure 6.40: Using ProLogic to give Trip Command via External Input

ProLogic 5: This equation provides indication via the L-PRO HMI display,
that the Recloser has locked out.
Figure 6.41: Recloser Lockout
ProLogic 6: This equation resets the 79 Lockout. It uses Virtual Input 1 “SCA-
DA Reset 79” to simulate a SCADA Lockout Reset command. In this case, this
is done by closing the Main Breaker Status (Out 5), then Auxiliary Breaker Sta-
tus (Out 6) to simulate main and auxiliary breaker closed status. This latching
function resets when the 79 Lead Lockout goes low.
Figure 6.42: Using Virtual Input to simulate SCADA Recloser Lockout Reset

ProLogic 7: This equation is intended only for giving indication of when the
79 Lockout is reset.
This indication, along with ProLogic 6, proves the 79 Reset timer (TD).
Figure 6.43: Main Recloser Lockout Reset Indication
ProLogic 8: This equation closes Out 6 to simulate auxiliary breaker closed

status from SCADA breaker close command OR auxiliary recloser operation.
This latching function resets when an external trip is received.
Figure 6.44: Auxiliary Breaker Close Command via Virtual Input

ProLogic 9: This equation closes Out 5 to simulate Main Breaker ‘a’ contact,
and also closes Out 14 to provide feedback into Main Breaker Status ProLogic
3. This latching function resets when an external trip is received.
Figure 6.45: Main Breaker Reclose
79 Reset Procedure (perform this before beginning the 79 Test)

1 In Terminal Mode Service level access Utilities>Maintenance>Control
Virtual Inputs.
2 Scroll to Virtual Input 2 (“SCADA LO Reset Ini”).
3 Pulse On (This simulates a SCADA 79 Lockout Reset Command”.)
Observe L-PRO Target: “Init LO Reset VI: PL6”
After 12 Seconds, Target: “Main LO is Reset: PL7”
End of 79 Reset procedure.

79 Test Procedure:
1 Access Utilities>Maintenance>Control Virtual Inputs.
2 Scroll to Virtual Input 1 (“SCADA Close Bkr 1&2”).
3 Pulse On (This simulates a SCADA Breaker Close command.)
Observe L-PRO actions on the L-PRO HMI:
Main Breaker Close and Aux Breaker Close
After 10 Seconds: External Trip (Time delay of ProLogic4)
After 2 Seconds: Main Bkr Reclose (Shot 1, T1)
After 8 Seconds: Auxiliary Breaker Close (Shot 1, TF)
After 2 Seconds: External Trip (PL4 – TF)
After 8 Seconds: Aux Breaker Close (Shot 2, TF)
After 1.3 Seconds: Recloser Lockout (1.0 seconds + Tp)
4 For detail of shot numbers, etc. observe the sequence of events by viewing:
Main Menu>Event Log or by pressing the View Logs button of the L-PRO
HMI. (Note: Targets need to be reset before you can view logs via HMI).
Figure 6.46: Event Log Showing Reclose Sequence (HyperTerminal)
5 To perform this test again, reset the Lockout as per 79 Reset Procedure
above, then repeat the 79 test procedure.
End of 79 test.

7 Installation
Physical Mounting
Standard 3U The relay is 3 rack units or 5.25 inches high and approximately 12.25 inches
deep. The standard relay is designed for a 19-inch rack. A complete mechani-
cal drawing is shown, for details see “Mechanical Drawings” in Appendix G.
To install the relay you need the following:
• 19 inch rack
• 4 - #10 screws
Optional 4U The relay is 4 rack units or 7.0 inches high and approximately 12.25 inches
deep. The relay is designed for a 19-inch rack. A complete mechanical drawing
is shown, for details see “Mechanical Drawings” in Appendix G.
To install the relay you need the following:
• 19 inch rack
• 4 - #10 screws
AC and DC Wiring
For details see “AC Schematic Drawings” in Appendix I and “DC Schematic
Drawings” in Appendix J.
Communication Wiring
EIA-232 The relay’s three serial ports (Ports 1, 2 and 3) are configured as EIA RS-232
Data Communications Equipment (DCE) devices with female DB9 connec-
tors. This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a stan-
dard straight-through male-to-female serial cable. For pin-out details see
“Communication Port Details” on page 2-9.
An adapter is available for connecting an external modem to Port 2. For details,

see “Modem Link - External” on page 2-3.
RJ-45 The relay may have an optional internal modem or an optional internal
10BaseT Ethernet port. Connection to either of these is via the relay’s Port 5
RJ-45 receptacle. Labeling above the port will indicate which option, if any,
has been installed.
IRIG-B Wiring The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG-B standard time sig-
nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions.The IRIG-B connector on the
back of the relay is BNC type.

8 Cyber Security
System Access Control and Authorisation
Access to L-PRO is protected by login name and password. Each login name
is associated with an Access Level. Section 3 “Terminal Mode” provides de-
tails on the Access Levels and login names.
Password Password maximum length is 22 characters. Password may contain:

Complexity
• Lower case letters ( a – z )
• Upper case letters ( A – Z )
• Numeric characters ( 0 – 9 )
• Special characters as follows:
Table 8.1: Special Characters
Character ASCII Decimal Description
! 033 Exclamation mark
“ 034 Quotation mark
# 035 Number sign
$ 036 Dollar sign
% 037 Percent sign
& 038 Ampersand
‘ 039 Apostrophe
( 040 Left parenthesis
) 041 Right parenthesis
* 042 Asterisk
+ 043 Plus sign
, 044 Comma
- 045 Hyphen-minus
. 046 Full stop
/ 047 Slash (Solidus)
: 058 Colon
; 059 Semicolon
< 060 Less-than sign
= 061 Equal sign
> 062 Greater-than sign
? 063 Question mark

8 Cyber Security
Table 8.1: Special Characters

@ 064 At sign
[ 091 Left Square Bracket
] 093 Right Square Bracket
^ 094 Circumflex accent
_ 095 Low line
| 124 Vertical bar
{ 123 Left Curly Bracket
} 125 Right Curly Bracket
~ 126 Tilde
Special characters other than listed above may currently be used for
passwords. However, only the listed characters are guaranteed to be
supported in the future.
L-PRO does not inforce password complexity rules. However, password com-
pliance to the following complexity rules can be verified, when password is be-
ing updated
• Minimum password length 8 characters.
• At least one upper case character.
• At least one lower case character.
• At least one numerical character.
• At least one special character.
Access Timeout User is automatically logged out after 60 minutes of inactivity.
Access Level L-PRO automatically blocks (locks out) Access Level for 5 minutes after 7 un-
Blocking successful login attempts. Lock-out of one Access Level does not affect avail-
ability of the others.
Authorization by Each Access Level is assigned a set of functions authorized for it. The set of
Access Level functions is pre-defined and cannot be changed. Six Access Levels are defined.
Access Level list and set of functions associated with each level are described
in section 3 “Terminal Mode”.

8 Cyber Security
Cyber Security Event Monitoring and Logging

L-PRO monitors activities of the logged in user. If user actions result in a
change of IED critical resource, control or change of IED state, a Security No-
tification is generated. There are two types of Security Notification
• Security Events;
• Security Alarms.
Security Event is a Security Notification of an authorized activity, which has a
limited effect on L-PRO protection functions.
Security Alarm is a Security Notification of an authorized or unauthorized ac-
tivity, which may result in a loss of one or more protection functions or make
unit unusable.
L-PRO differentiate the following types of Cyber Security activities.
Table 8.2: Cyber Security Activity Types
Activity Message ID Description
Access to IED resources ACCS Access to the configuration, settings, records,

files and control data
Authentication AUTH User authentication
Security Management SECU Access to IED Security data

• Passwords
• Syslog Configuration
System state change SYST IED system state has changed or change is
imminent
Security Notifications are available via Cyber Security Notification messages.

L-PRO provides Cyber Security Notification messages to an external (relative
to L-PRO) Syslog server. Syslog server interface complies with RFC5424
(“The Syslog protocol”) and RFC5426 (“Transmission of Syslog messages
over UDP”) standards.
Cyber Security Notification messages are issued in real-time and can be used
for both logging and supervisory monitoring.
Syslog server settings are available in “Syslog Configuration” submenu (“Ter-
minal Mode” on page 3-5 for details).

8 Cyber Security
Cyber Security Notification message format

Cyber Security Notification message (message) is a text line. Message exam-
ple is shown below.
<84>1 2015-09-24T16:12:13-06:00 LPRO-2100-110614-01 secmgr - ACCS [[email protected] act="write" status="success" user="maintenance"] IP address
1" ! #!
2 $!
3 %
4! 5&! '!
6 (!
7 )!
8
1 - message priority
2 - message date
3 - time of day
4 - time zone offset
5 - Host Name
6 - message ID
7 - message data
8 - optional description
Message priority Message priority defines message relative importance. The lower the priority
value the more important (critical) is the message. The list of message priori-
ties is as follows.
Table 8.3: Message Priority List
Message Priority Severity (RFC 5424)
Security Alarms
32 Emergency
33 Alert
34 Error
Security Events
81 Alert
82 Critical
83 Error
84 Warning
85 Notice
Message Date Message date has format YYYY-MM-DD.

8 Cyber Security
Time of Day Time of day has format HH-MM-SS.
Time Zone Offset Time zone offset has format +/- HH-MM. If time zone offset equals 0 (UTC),
then “Z” notation is used instead as shown in the example below.
<84>1 2015-09-24T16:12:13Z 192.168.103.10 secmgr - ACCS [[email protected] act="write" status="success" user="maintenance"] IP address
Host Name ‘Host Name” field identifies IED issuing the Syslog Notification message. The
field can be configured to contain one of the following values
• Unit IP Address;
• Unit Serial Number;
• Unit ID.
Selection of the ‘Host Name” field value is available in the “Syslog Configu-
ration” menu.
Figure 8.1, Figure 8.2 and Figure 8.3 below illustrate relationship between
Syslog Configuration menu selection and ‘Host Name” field.
Maintenance Menu
<84>1 2015-09-24T16:12:13-06:00 192.168.103.10 secmgrn - ACCS [[email protected] act="write" status="success" user="maintenance"] IP address
Figure 8.1: Unit IP Address as “Host Name”
<84>1 2015-09-24T16:12:13-06:00 LPRO-2100-110614-01 secmgr - ACCS [[email protected] act="write" status="sucess" user="maintenance"] IP address
Figure 8.2: Unit Serial Number as “Host Name”

8 Cyber Security
<84>1 2015-09-24T16:12:13-06:00 Line_XYZ_IED1 secmgr - ACCS [[email protected] act="write" status="success" user="maintenance"] IP address
Figure 8.3: Unit ID as “Host Name”
Message Data Message data provides Security Notification details. It starts with the message
data ID that uniquely identifies the purpose of data, followed by parameter-val-
ue pairs. In the above examples on Figure 8.1 through Figure 8.3, message data
ID is “[email protected]”. The list of message data IDs is as follows.
Table 8.4: Message Data ID List
Message Data ID Message ID Description
[email protected] AUTH User login
[email protected] AUTH User logout
[email protected] SECU Access to IED password settings
[email protected] SECU Access to IED Syslog Configuration
[email protected] ACCS Access to IED configuration data
[email protected] ACCS Access to IED settings data
[email protected] ACCS IED firmware update information
[email protected] ACCS Access to/Control of IED Records
[email protected] ACCS Access to IED Event Log
[email protected] ACCS IED Virtual Inputs control
[email protected] ACCS IED Output Contacts control
[email protected] ACCS IED Time Settings change
[email protected] ACCS IED Calibration Settings change
[email protected] ACCS Access to IED System Archive
[email protected] SYST IED System Event

8 Cyber Security
IP Ports and Services

Table 8.5: IP Ports and Services describes IP ports and services available
within L-PRO.
Table 8.5: IP Ports and Services
Port Control Protocol Service Comments
23 Always enabled TCP Telnet User interface access
20000 Enabled/disabled TCP/UDP DNP3 DNP3 communication. Port

number is configurable.
Port is disabled, if DNP3 SCADA
communication over Ethernet is
disabled
514 Enabled/disabled UDP Syslog Syslog server communication.

Port number is configurable.

8 Cyber Security
IEEE 1686 Table of Compliance
Clause
Clause/sub Clause Title Status Comment
Number
5 IED cyber security features Acknowledge
5.1 Electronic access control Exception
5.1.1 IED access control overview Comply
5.1.2 Password defeat mechanisms Comply
5.1.3 Number of individual users Exception Number of individual users is 6
5.1.4 Password construction Exception Password complexity rules are not enforced, but
can be validated
5.1.5 IED access control Exception
5.1.5.1 Authorization levels by password Exception Authorization level is defined by login name
5.1.5.2 Authorization using role-based access Exception Authorization using RBAC is not supported
control (RBAC)
5.1.6 IED main security functions Exception
5.1.6 a) View data Comply
5.1.6 b) View configuration settings Comply
5.1.6 c) Force values Comply
5.1.6 d) Configuration change Comply
5.1.6 e) Firmware change Comply
5.1.6 f) ID/password or RBAC management Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.1.6 g) Audit trail Exception Audit trail is not supported
5.1.7 Password display Exception Passwords are displayed when user logs in
5.1.8 Access timeout Exception Access timeout period is 60 minutes and cannot be
changed
5.2 Audit trail Exception Audit trail is not supported. Cyber Security Notifica-
tion to an external Syslog(RFC 5424) server is pro-
vided instead
5.2.1 Audit trail background Exception Not supported
5.2.2 Storage capability Exception Not supported
5.2.3 Storage record Exception
5.2.3 a) Event record number Exception Not supported
5.2.3 b) Time and date Comply
5.2.3 c) User identification Comply
5.2.3 d) Event type Comply
5.2.4 Audit trail event types Exception

8 Cyber Security
5.2.4 a) Log in Comply
5.2.4 b) Manual log out Comply
5.2.4 c) Timed log out Comply
5.2.4 d) Value forcing Comply
5.2.4 e) Configuration access Comply
5.2.4 f) Configuration change Comply
5.2.4 g) Firmware change Comply
5.2.4 h) ID/password creation or modification Comply
5.2.4 i) ID/Password deletion Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.2.4 j) Audit log access Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.2.4 k) Time/date change Comply
5.2.4 l) Alarm incident Exception Not all alarm incidents are supported
5.3 Supervisory monitoring and control Exception
5.3.1 Overview of supervisory monitoring and Comply Real-time Cyber Security Notification (Events and
control Alarms) is available via Syslog protocol in compli-
ance with RFC 5424 and RFC 5426 standards
5.3.2 Events Comply
5.3.3 Alarms Exception
5.3.3 a) Unsuccessful login attempt Comply
5.3.3 b) Reboot: Comply
5.3.3 c) Attempted use of unauthorized configuration Exception Not supported

software
5.3.3 d) Invalid configuration or firmware download Comply
5.3.3 e) Unauthorized configuration or firmware file Exception Not supported
5.3.3 f) Time signal out of tolerance Exception Not supported
5.3.3 g) Invalid field hardware changes Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.3.4 Alarm point change detect Comply
5.3.5 Event and alarm grouping Comply Event and Alarm grouping is predefined.
Event groups:
• Notice
• Warning
• Error
• Critical
• Alert
Alarm groups:
• Error
• Alert
• Emergency
5.3.6 Supervisory permissive control Exception Not supported
5.4 IED cyber security features Exception
5.4.1 IED functionality compromise Acknowledge

5.4.2 Specific cryptographic features Exception
5.4.2 a) Webserver functionality Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.4.2 b) File transfer functionality Exception Not supported
5.4.2 c) Text-oriented communication facilities Exception Not supported
5.4.2 d) Single Network Management Protocol Comply Feature not offered in this product
(SNMP)
5.4.2 e) Network time synchronization Comply Feature not offered in this product
5.4.2 f) Secure tunnel functionality Exception Not supported
5.4.3 Cryptographic techniques Exception Not supported
5.4.4 Encrypting serial communications Exception Not supported
5.4.5 Protocol-specific security features Comply
5.5 IED configuration software Acknowledge
5.5.1 Authentication Exception Not supported
5.5.2 Digital signature Exception Not supported
5.5.3 ID/password control Exception Not supported
5.5.4 ID/password controlled features Exception Not supported
5.5.4.1 View configuration data Exception Not supported
5.5.4.2 Change configuration data Exception Not supported
5.6 Communications port access Exception Communication port access control is limited to
DNP3
5.7 Firmware quality assurance Comply

Appendix A IED Specifications
L-PRO Model 2100 Specifications

Item Quantity/Specs Note
General:
Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Operate Time 1.0 to 1.3 cycles at 80% reach Including output relay operation
Sampling Rate 96 samples/cycle Records up to 25th harmonic
Power Supply Nominal Range: 48 to 250 Vdc, 120

Vac, 50/60 Hz
Full Operating Range: 40 to 300 Vdc
Memory Settings and records are stored in non- Records are stored in a circular buffer
volatile memory
Protection Functions:
IEEE Dev. 21P-1, 2, 3, 4, 21N-1, 2, 3, 4, Line protection takes in up to 6 voltages Suitable for ring bus configurations
27, 50BF, 50LS, 50/51/67, 50N/51N/67, and 6 currents
46/50//51/67, 59, 60, 68, 79, Sync Check, Extra 6 currents used for recording and
81, Dead Line Pickup, Weak Infeed, Pro- ProLogic input
Logic, Group Logic and Virtual Inputs
Recording:
Fault 96 s/c oscillography of all analog and Viewing software provides waveform,
external input channels symmetrical components and harmonic
Capacity: up to 15 x 2 second records analysis
Dynamic Swing 1 s/c phasor measurements of line posi-

tive sequence V and I plus frequency
Capacity: up to 15 x 3 minute records
Events 250 events Circular event log
A/D Resolution 13 bits, 8192 counts full scale.
Input & Output:
Analog Input Channels 18 (6 line currents, 3 line and 3 bus volt- Rating: In = 5 A or 1 A, Vn = 69 V
ages, plus 6 currents for bus monitor- Continuous: 3x In, 2x Vn
ing) One Second: 20x In without distortion
One Minute: 3x Vn, once per hour
Sampling Resolution 12 bits plus sign, amplitude measure-

ment accuracy: ± 0.5% for 54 to 66 Hz
Burden AC input voltage: < 0.15 VA @ 67 V, ac

Input current:  0.50 VA @ 5 A
Analog Input Sampling Sample rate: 96 samples/cycle for

recording, 8x/cycle for protection
External Inputs 9 isolated inputs (3U chassis) Optional 48 to 125 or 125 to 250 Vdc
20 isolated inputs (4U chassis) nominal, externally wetted
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A-1


Burden Burden resistance: > 10 k ohms
Isolation Internal optical isolation
Sample Rate 1 ms resolution
External Input Turn-on Voltage 48 Vdc range = 27 to 40 Vdc Specified voltages are over full ambient
125 Vdc = 75 to 100 Vdc temperature range.
250 Vdc = 150 to 200 Vdc
Output Relays (contacts) 14 programmable outputs (3U chassis) 14 or 21 relay trip, 1 relay inoperative
21 programmable outputs (4U chassis) Make: 30 A as per IEEE C37.90
Carry: 8 A
Break: 0.9 A at 125 Vdc
0.35 A at 250 Vdc
Interface & Communication:
Front Display 2 lines x 24 characters, fluorescent Exceptional visibility in all ambient

light conditions
Front Panel Indicators 6 LEDs Target, Relay Functional, IRIG-B Func-

tional, Service Required, Test Mode,
Alarm
Serial User Interface Front and rear RS-232 ports to 57.6 K Rear port can support an external
baud modem
Internal Modem 33.6 Kbps, V.32 bis Optional internal modem
Network 10BaseT Ethernet port Optional Ethernet card
SCADA Interface DNP3 (RS-232 or Ethernet) or Modbus Rear port

(RS-232)
Time Sync IRIG-B, BNC connector Modulated or unmodulated, auto-detect
Self Checking/Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative
Terminal User Interface VT100 terminal emulation Accessible via serial, modem or net-
work interface
Environmental:
Ambient Temperature Range -40°C to 85°C IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2
Humidity Up to 95% without condensation IEC 60068-2-30
Insulation Test (Hi-Pot) Power supply, analog inputs, external IEC 60255-5
inputs, output contacts – 1.5 kV, 50/60
Hz, 1 minute.
Electrical Fast Transient ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989
Oscillatory Transient ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989
RFI Susceptibility ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, IEC 255-22-3
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Sinusoidal Vibration 10 Hz to 150 Hz, 0.15 mm or 20 m/s2, IEC 60068-2-6

10 sweep cycles
Physical:
Appendix A-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00


Weight 11.1 kg (3U chassis) 24.47 lbs (3U chassis)
14.5 kg (4U chassis) 32.0 lbs (4U chassis)
Dimensions 13.3 cm (3U chassis) 5.25" (3U chassis)

17.7 cm (4U chassis) 7" (4U chassis)
48.3 cm rack mount 19" rack mount
30.5 cm deep 12" deep
Time Synchronization and Accuracy
External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG-B input (mod- Free Running Accuracy: In the absence
ulated or unmodulated) auto detect of an external time source, the relay
maintains time with a maximum ±15
minutes drift per year over the full oper-
ating temperature range, and maxi-
mum ±90 seconds drift per year at a
constant temperature of 25°C. The
relay can detect loss or re-establish-
ment of external time source and auto-
matically switch between internal and
external time.
Synchronization Accuracy Sampling clocks synchronized with the

time source (internal or external)
Overall L-PRO Accuracies
Current ±2.5% of inputs from 0.1 to 1.0 x nominal current (In)
1.0% of inputs from 1.0 to 20.0 x nominal current (In)
Voltage 1.0% of inputs from 0.01 to 2.00 x nominal voltage (Vn)
Impedance ±5.0% or 5 m of set value from 0.05 to 66.00 ohms secondary (0.25 to 330.00
ohms secondary, 1 A nominal)
Directional Phase Angle ±2.0° of set value of Positive Sequence Line Angle value from 25.0° to 89.0°
Frequency Elements ±0.001 Hz (fixed level)
±0.05 Hz (df/dt)
Sync Check Elements ±0.2 degrees
Timers ±2.5 ms of set value plus 1.00 to 1.50 cycles of inherent delay
Inverse Overcurrent Timers ±2.5% or ±1 cycle of selected curve
Definite Overcurrent Timers ±2.5% or ±1 cycle non-directional
±2.5% or ±1.5 cycle directional
Frequency Timer ±2.5% of set value plus 1.25 cycles to 1.75 cycles of inherent delay (fixed level)
at 2x pickup, error <40 ms (df/dt)
at 0.1 Hz/s above pickup, error <100 ms
Burden AC Voltage Inputs, < 0.15 VA @ 69 volts
AC Current Inputs,  0.5 VA @ 5 A

Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal

Frequency
Figure A.1: on page 4, Figure A.3: on page 5 and Figure A.5: on page 6 show
operating times for the L-PRO Relay distance elements.
The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact
operate time.
Faults were applied at a location representing a percentage of the Zone 1 relay
reach setting.
Tests were performed for source impedance ratios (SIR) of 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, and
30.0.
No pre-fault load current or fault resistance was included. Operating times are
the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
L-PRO Phase Mho Operating Times

Phase-to-Phase Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Fault Location (%of Z1 Reach)
Figure A.1: L-PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase-to-Phase Faults (with CCVT
setting disabled)

L-PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase-to-Phase Faults

with CCVT Transient Compensation Enabled
3
2.5
Time (cycles)
SIR = 30
SIR = 10
1.5 SIR = 5
SIR = 1
SIR = 0.1
1
0.5
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Fault Location (% of Z1 Reach)
Figure A.2: L-PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase-to-Phase Faults (with CCVT
setting enabled)
L-PRO Ground Mho Operating Times

Single Line-to-Ground Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Figure A.3: L-PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line -to-Ground Faults (with
CCVT setting disabled)

L-PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line-to-Ground Faults

2.5
1.5
Time (cycles)
SIR = 30
SIR = 10
SIR = 5
1 SIR = 1
SIR = 0.1
0.5
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Figure A.4: L-PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line -to-Ground Faults (with
CCVT setting enabled)
L-PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times

Single Line-to-Ground Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Figure A.5: L-PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line-to-Ground Faults (with
CCVT setting disabled)

L-PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line-to-Ground Faults

2.5
1.5
Time (cycles)
SIR = 30
SIR = 10
SIR = 5
SIR = 1
1 SIR = 0.1
0.5
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Figure A.6: L-PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line-to-Ground Faults (with
CCVT setting enabled)

Frequency Element Operating Time Curves
Figure A.7: Time delay Error at .2 Seconds, Figure A.8: Time Delay Error at 1
Second and Figure A.9: Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds show operating times
for the L-PRO frequency rate of change elements at different time delay set-
tings and rate of change settings.
The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact
operate time. Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Time Delay Error @ 0.2s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Delay error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Hz/s Pickup Multiple
Figure A.7: Time delay Error at .2 Seconds
Time Delay Error @ 1s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.8: Time Delay Error at 1 Second

Time Delay Error @ 10s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)

105
0.1 Hz/s
1 Hz/s
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.9: Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds
External Input Pickup Filter

To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses an external input pickup
filter setting has been introduced. This setting is made in terminal mode under,
Utilities>Setup>External Inputs. The setting is an integer number representing
the number of samples in a packet of 12 that must be recognized by the DSP as
high before an External Input status is changed from low to high. This will af-
fect the pulse width required for the External Inputs to be detected. Below is a
table describing the pulse widths for possible and definite defection for each
setting.
Input Pulse Width required

Pickup Filter Input Pulse Width required for
for EI to be definitely
Count EI to be possibly detected
detected
4 0.694 ms 1.215 ms
5 0.868 ms 1.563 ms
6 1.042 ms 1.909 ms
7 1.215 ms 2.257 ms
8 1.389 ms 2.604 ms
9 1.563 ms 2.951 ms
10 1.736 ms 3.299 ms
11 1.909 ms 3.645 ms
12 2.083 ms 3.993 ms

For a setting of 6, it will take between 1.042 and 1.909 ms for an External Input
to be declared as high. The default setting is 4, which was the number that was
used in the L-PRO prior to Version 10.

Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges
Settings and When a setting has been completed in Offliner Settings software, it can be
Ranges printed along with the ranges available for these settings. This is a view only
option; to change the settings you must go back into the particular setting that
you wish to change. The summary is a quick way to view all the settings in a
compact form.
The top part of the settings summary contains all the information from the Re-
lay Identification screen.
The setting summary provides a list of all the current and voltage analog input
quantity names used for protection and recording. External Inputs and Output
contact names are also identified on this summary.
L-PRO Settings Summary - Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]
Name Symbol/Value Unit Range
Relay Identification
Settings Version 10
Ignore Serial Number No
Serial Number LPRO-2100-991001-01
Unit ID UnitID
Setting Name Default Settings
Nominal CT Secondary Current 5A
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz
Standard I/O 9 External Inputs, 14 Out-

put Contacts
Optional I/O Not Installed
Comments Comments
Date Created-Modified 2000-09-06 16:21:22
Station Name Station Name
Station Number 1
Location Location
Line D245
Analog Input Names
LVA Main Voltage A
LVB Main Voltage B
LVC Main Voltage C
LIA Main Line Current A
LIB Main Line Current B
LIC Main Line Current C
IA2 Aux. Line Current A
IB2 Aux. Line Current B
IC2 Aux. Line Current C
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B-1

IA3 Current 3 A
IB3 Current 3 B
IC3 Current 3 C
IA4 Current 4 A
IB4 Current 4 B
IC4 Current 4 C
BVA Aux. Voltage A
BVB Aux. Voltage B
BVC Aux. Voltage C
1 Spare 1
2 Spare 2
3 Spare 3
4 Spare 4
5 Spare 5
6 Spare 6
7 Spare 7
8 Spare 8
9 Spare 9
Output Contact Names
Output 1 Spare 1
Output 2 Spare 2
Output 3 Spare 3
Output 4 Spare 4
Output 5 Spare 5
Output 6 Spare 6
Output 7 Spare 7
Output 8 Spare 8
Output 9 Spare 9
Output 10 Spare 10
Output 11 Spare 11
Output 12 Spare 12
Output 13 Spare 13
Output 14 Spare 14
Output Contact Dropout Timers
Output1 ( Spare 1 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output2 ( Spare 2 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output3 ( Spare 3 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output4 ( Spare 4 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Appendix B-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Output5 ( Spare 5 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output6 ( Spare 6 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output7 ( Spare 7 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output8 ( Spare 8 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output9 ( Spare 9 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output10 ( Spare 10 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output11 ( Spare 11 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output12 ( Spare 12 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output13 ( Spare 13 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Output14 ( Spare 14 ) 0.10 s 0.00 to 1.00
Virtual Input Names
VI 1 Virtual Input 1

Setting Group Names
Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
System Parameters
Base MVA 100.00 MVA 1.00 to 1000.00
Phase Rotation ABC
Aux Voltage Input Three Phase
Target Latching Enabled
Fault Location Display Enabled
Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Disabled
Ring Bus Configuration (Aux CT Line Enabled

Input)
Main/Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 240.00 :1 (Protection & Record- 1.00 to

ing) 10000.00
CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Disabled

Devices
Current Input #3 CT Ratio 400.00 :1 (Recording & ProLogic 1.00 to

Input) 10000.00
Current Input #4 CT Ratio 500.00 :1 (Recording & ProLogic 1.00 to

Input) 10000.00
Main PT Turns Ratio 2000.00 :1 (Protection & Record- 1.00 to

ing) 20000.00
Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 2000.00 :1 (Protection & Record- 1.00 to

ing) 20000.00
Line to Line Voltage 230.00 kV 1.00 to 1000.00
Distance Unit Selection km
Record Length
Fault Record Length 0.5 s 0.2 to 2.0
Swing Rcd. Length 120 s 60 to 120
Event Auto Save Disabled
Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]
Setting Group Comments:
Line Parameters
Line Length 200.00 km 0.50 to 2000.00
Positive Sequence Impedance (Z1) 14.40 ohm 0.05 to 66.00

Positive Sequence Angle (Z1) 80.0 deg 45.0 to 89.0
Zero Sequence Impedance (Z0) 36.00 ohm 0.05 to 300.00
Zero Sequence Angle (Z0) 70.0 deg 45.0 to 89.0
K0 Override Disabled
K0 Magnitude 0.51 - 0.10 to 2.00
K0 Angle -16.5 deg -25.0 to 25.0
Scheme Selector
Scheme Selection POTT
Communication Receiver1 EI 1 [Spare 1]
Communication Receiver2 <disabled>
Scheme Send Pickup Delay (TL3) 0.100 s 0.000 to 1.000
Scheme Send Dropout Delay (TD3) 0.200 s 0.000 to 1.000
POTT Current Reversal Pickup Delay 0.300 s 0.000 to 0.500

(TL1)
POTT Current Reversal Dropout Delay 0.400 s 0.000 to 0.500

(TD1)
DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup Delay (TL2) 0.500 s 0.005 to 0.500
DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout Delay 0.500 s 0.000 to 0.500

(TD2)
50N-67F - Overcurrent Carrier Trip
Action Disabled
Direction Forward
3I0 Pickup 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Pickup Delay 0.020 s 0.005 to 1.000
50N-67R - Overcurrent Carrier Block
Action Disabled
Direction Reverse
3I0 Pickup 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
52 - Breaker Status
Main Breaker EI 3 [Spare 3]
Aux. Breaker EI 2 [Spare 2]
Protection Summary
21P, Zone 1 Enabled
21P, Zone 2 Enabled
21P, Zone 3 Enabled
21P, Zone 4 Enabled
21N, Zone 1 Enabled
21N, Zone 2 Enabled
21N, Zone 3 Enabled

21N, Zone 4 Enabled
68 Off
Dead Line Pickup Enabled
Weak Infeed Enabled
25 Sync Check Enabled
Dead Main Live Aux (DMLA) Enabled
Live Main Dead Aux (LMDA) Enabled
Dead Main Dead Aux (DMDA) Enabled
79 Enabled
59 Main Enabled
59 Aux Enabled
27 Main Enabled
27 Aux Enabled
60 Enabled
81-1 Fixed Level
81-2 Fixed Level
81-3 Rate of Change
81-4 Rate of Change
50LS Main (Input 1) Enabled
50LS Aux (Input 2) Enabled
50LS Input 3 Enabled
50BF Main Enabled
50BF Aux Enabled
50 Enabled
51 Enabled
50N Enabled
51N Enabled
46-50 Enabled
46-51 Enabled
21P - Phase Distance: Zone 1
21P - Zone 1 Enabled
Forward Reach 11.52 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Mho Char. Angle 90.0 deg 70.0 to 140.0
Delta Current Supervision 5.0 A 0.2 to 50.0

Reverse Reach 1.44 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Forward Reach fixed at 0 (secondary

ohm) for POTT or Block-
ing scheme
Load Impedance (common for 21N, 21P,

and 68)
Load Resistance (R) 20.0 ohm -150.0 to 150.0
Load Reactance (X) 15.0 ohm -150.0 to 150.0
21N - Ground Distance: Zone 1
21N - Zone 1 Enabled
Type Mho
Left Reach (R1) 4.00 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Right Reach (R2) 4.00 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Phase Current Supervision 5.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
3I0 Supervision 2.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Type Mho

Type Mho
Type Mho
Forward Reach fixed at 0 (secondary

ohm) for POTT or Block-
ing scheme
68 - Out of Step Protection
Mode Off
Zone 1 Blocking Disabled
Out of step Swing Timer 0.50 s 0.00 to 1.00
I1 Supervision 10.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
3Io Blocking 5.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
Blocking Reset Time 1.50 s 0.25 to 2.00
LHS Outer (R1) -20.0 ohm -100.0 to -17.0
LHS Inner (R2) -17.0 ohm -20.0 to 17.0
RHS Inner(R3) 17.0 ohm -17.0 to 20.0

RHS Outer(R4) 20.0 ohm 17.0 to 100.0
Dead Line Pickup
Dead Line Pickup Enabled
27 Vpos Pickup 68.0 V 0.0 to 69.0
50 Pickup 10.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
50N Pickup 10.0 A 0.1 to 50.0
Second Harmonic Restraint Enabled
I2/I1 Ratio 5.1 - 0.0 to 10.0
Weak Infeed
Weak Infeed Enabled
27 V1 Pickup 64.3 V 0.0 to 69.0
59 V0 Pickup 20.0 V 0.0 to 100.0
Zone2/Zone4 Reset Delay (TWD1) 0.10 s 0.02 to 0.20
Comm. Cycle Reset Delay (TWD2) 0.05 s 0.02 to 0.20
Comm. Reset Time Delay (TWD3) 0.15 s 0.02 to 1.00
25/27/59 - Sync Check
25 Sync Check Enabled
Maximum Voltage 70.0 V 60.0 to 138.0
Minimum Voltage 40.0 V 40.0 to 69.9
Angle Difference 20.0 deg 1.0 to 50.0
Dead Main Live Sync (DMLS) Enabled
Live Main Dead Sync (LMDS) Enabled
Dead Main Dead Sync (DMDS) Enabled
79 - Recloser
79 Enabled
Number of Shots 1
First Reclose (T1) 1.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Second Reclose (T2) 5.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Third Reclose (T3) 10.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Fourth Reclose (T4) 20.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Close Time (Tp) 0.2 s 0.1 to 1.0
Lockout Reset (TD) 25.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Initiate Reset (TDI) 1.0 s 0.0 to 999.9
Sync Control Disabled
Recloser Mode Main Only
Block Reset (TDB) 0.5 s 0.0 to 999.9
Follower Time (TF) 5.0 s 0.0 to 24.9
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 50.0 s 0.0 to 999.9

Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser

Follower Time (TF)
59 - Overvoltage
59 Main Enabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 50.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59 Auxiliary Enabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 50.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
27 - Undervoltage
27 Main Enabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 10.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
27 Auxiliary Enabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 10.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
Loss Of Potential Alarm (60)
60 Enabled
I1 Blocking 10.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
3I0 Blocking 2.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
81 - Over/Under Frequency
81-1 Fixed Level
Pickup 60.005 Hz [50.000,

59.995] or
[60.005,
70.000]
81-2 Fixed Level
Pickup 60.005 Hz [50.000,

59.995] or
[60.005,
70.000]
81-3 Rate of Change
Pickup 10.0 Hz/s [-10.0, -0.1] or

[0.1, 10.0]
81-4 Rate of Change
Pickup 10.0 Hz/s [-10.0, -0.1] or

[0.1, 10.0]

50LS - Low Set Overcurrent
50LS Main (Input 1) Enabled
Pickup 0.50 A 0.10 to 50.00
50LS Auxiliary (Input 2) Enabled
Pickup 0.50 A 0.10 to 50.00
Pickup 0.50 A 0.10 to 50.00
Pickup 0.50 A 0.10 to 50.00
50BF - Breaker Failure
50BF Main Enabled
Pickup Delay 1 0.50 s 0.01 to 99.99
50BF Auxiliary Enabled
50/51/67 - Phase Overcurrent
50 Enabled
Directional Control forward
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
Pickup Delay 1.00 A 0.01 to 99.99
51 Enabled
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
Curve Type IEC very inverse
TMS 0.50 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 13.5 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 1.0 - -
TR 47.30 - -
50N/51N/67 - Neutral Overcurrent
50N Enabled
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00

51N Enabled
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
TMS 0.50 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 13.5 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 1.0 - -
TR 47.30 - -
46-50/46-51/67 - Negative Sequence

Overcurrent
46-50 Enabled
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
46-51 Enabled
Pickup 10.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
TMS 0.50 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 13.5 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 1.0 - -
TR 47.30 - -
Z Circle Trigger
Swing Trigger Disabled
+ve Seq. Impedance 20.0 ohm 0.1 to 50.0
ProLogic 1 [ProLogic 1]
[ProLogic 1] Disabled
Target Enabled
Dropout Delay 0.00 s 0.00 to 999.00
Operator 1
Input A <Unused = 0>
Operator 2
Input B <Unused = 0>
Operator 3
Input C <Unused = 0>

Operator 4
Input D <Unused = 0>
Operator 5
Input E <Unused = 0>
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Target Enabled
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Group Logic 1 [Group Logic 1]
[Group Logic 1] Disabled
Setting Group to Activate none
Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3

Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1

Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5

Appendix C Hardware Description
The L-PRO is a sophisticated transformer protection relay with integral high-
quality fault recording.
External Input and The L-PRO Relay has 9 channels of external inputs provided by the External
Comm Board Input and Comm Board. Inputs are optically isolated, factory pre-set to the cus-
tomer’s requested voltage level. Two dual-range user-selectable external-input
voltage-level model of the External Input and Comm Board are available. This
allows you to select between 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or 125 Vdc and 250 Vdc
(nominal) on a per input basis.
The External Input and Comm Board also provides the relay with 2 rear-panel
RS-232 ports, IRIG-B time synchronization input, and optional network or
telephone connection. The RS-232 ports are female DB-9S connectors, IRIG-
B is a male BNC, and network or telephone is a female RJ-45 modular jack.
Relay Output Board The Relay Output Board provides 14 normally open contact outputs for relay-
ing, alarms and control, one normally closed output contact for indicating
proper relay operation.
Power Supply Board The power supply operates from 40 to 300 Vdc or 120 Vac +- 20% at 50/60
Hz. This wide operating range provides easier installation by eliminating pow-
er supply ordering options.
AC Analog Input The AC Analog Input Board has 12 current transformer inputs and 6 potential
Board transformer inputs for ac current and voltage inputs. On-board anti-aliasing fil-
ters provide accurate and secure digitization of the ac input signals.
Main Processor The MPB has analog data acquisition, high-speed digital signal processing for
Board (MPB) triggering and data conversion, communications, and interface logic to per-
form the core functions of the relay.
The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) on a MPB performs the protective relaying
functions of the relay, separate from the 486 CPU. It has its own flash memory
and self-checking for fully independent operation.
The Main Processor Board has:
• 24 channels of high-speed 12 bit-plus-sign analog-to-digital conversion
• Re-programmable flash memory for the DSP allows independent relay op-
eration and field software upgrades
• Floating point DSP for fast capture and manipulation of data
• Standard RS-232 serial communications ports
• High speed link between DSP and 486 processors
• Time synchronism processor with automatic detection of modulated and
unmodulated IRIG-B
• Sophisticated fault detection and “watchdog” recovery hardware
486 CPU Board A 486-class CPU provides data storage, information management, housekeep-
ing, and communications for the relay. The 486 runs a real-time operating sys-
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix C-1

Appendix C Hardware Description
tem optimized for high speed, high precision computing. The 486 provides
sophisticated facilities for communications and field software updates. Local
and wide area networking is supported by providing the relay with a path to fu-
ture networking capability.
A highly reliable solid-state flash disk on the CPU board provides the operat-
ing software for the 486, and stores the relay’s recordings.
Front Panel Board The Front Panel Board provides visual indication of the status of the relay, an
alphanumeric display and keypad for system monitoring, and a front-panel RS-
232 port.
Relay Output and

DC Analog Input Board
External Input
and Comm Board
Power Supply
Board AC Analog
Input Board
486
CPU Board
Main
Processor
Board
Front Panel
Board
Appendix C-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Appendix D Event Messages
L-PRO Event Messages
Event Log Message Notes
21P1 ABC 12.3km:Trip The possible phase information for 21P1–

21P4 will be:
21P2 ABC 12.3km:Trip • AB
• BC
• CA
21P3 ABC 12.3km:Trip • AB, BC
• AB, CA
21P4 ABC 12.3km:Trip • CA, BC
• ABC
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABGBC
• BCGCA
• CAGAB
• ABCG
21N1 AG 12.3km:Trip The possible phase information for 21N1–

N4 will be:
21N2 AG 12.3km:Trip • AG
• BG
• CG
21N3 AG 12.3km:Trip • ABG
• BCG
21N4 AG 12.3km:Trip • CAG
• ABCG
21P2 ABC 12.3km:Alarm The possible phase information for 21P2–

21P4 will be:
21P3 ABC 12.3km:Alarm • AB
• BC
• CA
21P4 ABC 12.3km:Alarm • AB, BC
• AB, CA
• CA, BC
• ABC
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABGBC
• BCGCA
• CAGAB
• ABCG
21N2 AG 12.3km:Alarm The possible phase information for 21N2–

N4 and 50N/51N will be:
21N3 AG 12.3km:Alarm • AG
• BG
• CG
21N4 AG 12.3km:Alarm • ABG
• BCG
51N AG 12.3km:Trip • CAG
• ABCG
50N AG 12.3km:Trip
46-51: Trip
46-50: Trip
51 ABC:Trip The possible phase information will be:

•A
50 ABC:Trip •B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51N: Alarm
46-51: Alarm
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix D-1

51 ABC: Alarm The possible phase information will be:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
Impedance Circle Trigger
68 Out of Step: Trip Trip or Alarm based on 68 mode setting
PUTT 12.3 kM: Trip
DCB 12.3 km: Trip
POTT 12.3 km: Trip
POTT (WI) 12.3 km: Trip Weak Infeed (WI) is not available unless
POTT is selected.
PUTT: Send
POTT: Send
POTT: Send (WI) Weak Infeed (WI) is not available unless

POTT is selected.
DCB: Send
Dead Line Pickup ABC The possible phase information will be:
•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
ProLogic Name: PLn ProLogic outputs names are user assigned
Extern Input Name: EIn: High External input names are user assigned
Extern Input Name: EIn: Low External input names are user assigned
Virtual Inputs: EIn: High Virtual Inputs are user assigned
Virtual Inputs: EIn: High Virtual Inputs are user assigned
Output Contacts: EIn: High Output Contact Names are user assigned
Output Contacts: EIn: High Output Contacts names are user assigned
60 LOP ABC: Alarm The possible phase information will be:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
68 Inner Blinder: Alarm
68 Outer Blinder: Alarm
Com-Aided (Z2,Wi): Send Scheme types: WI, Z2, Z2 & WI, Z2 is Zone
2 POTT and WI is Weak Infeed
Appendix D-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

27 Main ABC: Trip The possible phase information will be:

•A
27 Aux. ABC: Trip •B
•C
• AB
59 Main ABC: Trip • BC
• CA
59 Aux. ABC: Trip • ABC
50LS Main ABC: Trip
50LS Aux. ABC: Trip
252759 Sync Check: Armed
50BF-1 Main ABC:Trip The possible phase information will be:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
50BF-2 Main ABC:Trip
50BF-1 Aux ABC:Trip
50BF-2 Aux ABC:Trip
81-1: Trip
81-2: Trip
81-3: Trip
81-4: Trip
79 Initiated: High Recloser is initiated.
79 Lead Lockout: High Recloser shot count has expired and

reclosing attempts are blocked.
79 Follow Lockout: High Follow breaker has failed to reclose.
79 Main Reclose: shot n Recloser Main circuit breaker close attempt

where n equals the shot count.
79 Follow Reclose: shot n Recloser Aux. circuit breaker close attempt

where n equals the shot count.
79 Block: High Recloser is blocked by an external signal.
Self Check: DC Ch.n: Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1

to 18.
Self Check: DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level, condition has reset.
Self Check: DC Ch.n: O/P Block Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1

to 18. Relay is blocked.
New Settings loaded, Active group n. Where n = 1-8
New Setting Loaded
Manual Settings Load request, activate SGn Manual or user-initiated settings change.
Manual Settings Load request completed Completion of user-initiated settings

change.
Changed Active Group from x to y This happens when relay changes setting
Logic n group. Automatic group logic initiated set-
ting group change
User changed Active Group from x to y This happens when the relay changes set-
ting group. User initiated setting group
change

Unit Recalibrated
Unit restarted
User logged In
Details of Failure
Modes
Relay
User
Inputs DSP X86
Laptop or
Digital Signal Micro-
Remote Connection
Outputs Processor processor
Watch-dog Watch-dog
System Failure or
Self Check Fail
DSP
Failure
Service Required
DSP-to-X86 on front panel goes
Communication from off to red
Relay Functional Failure or
on front panel goes Self Check Fail
from green to off
Self Check Fail

The Master Relay is de- to user-selectable
energized. Two of its aux. output relay
contacts open, discon- contacts close.
necting all power to the
other auxiliary relays. A
separate contact labelled,
Relay Inoperative on the
rear panel closes to
activate a remote alarm.
The watch-dog repeatedly

attempts to re-start the DSP
for diagnostic purposes. The
green light stays off and the
relays remain de-energized,
even for a successful re-start.
Only a power-down/power-up
will reset the LED to green and
re-energize the relays.
Note: For either of the above cases the DSP controller functions con-
tinue with normal auxiliary relay outputs provided that DSP failure or
Self Check Fail: Block has not occurred.

Self Check Fail due The DSP has an algorithm that detects continuous dc levels on the analog in-
to DC Offset puts and initiates alarms and relay output contact blocking when the measured
Detector
dc level exceeds the Alarm or Block level. The Alarm level is intended to pro-
vide an early indication of a problem. The Block level blocks the relay from
false-tripping by preventing any output contact from closing. The Relay Func-
tional LED turns off, but the protection functions will operate normally, with
the exception that the output contacts will not be allowed to close. The Relay
Inoperative contact will close for a Block condition. The following table de-
scribes all the Alarm/Block indication functions
Action Condition
Alarm Block
Relay Functional LED off X
Service Required LED on X X
Self Check Fail Signal high X X
Relay Inoperative Contact closed X
Output Contacts held open X
Event Log Message X X
Status available through SCADA X X
The Self Check Fail signal, which is available in the Output Matrix, TUI me-
tering and SCADA, can be used to signal an alarm. Note that if this signal is
mapped to an output contact, the contact which it is mapped to will only be
closed for an alarm condition. If the relay is in the Block condition, the Relay
Inoperative contact must be used to signal an alarm.
The status of the Self Check Fail is available through the SCADA services pro-
vided by the L-PRO. The digital signal Self Check Fail will indicate that DSP
has detected a continuous dc level and the analog metering value Self Check
Fail Parameter is used to indicate which condition, Alarm or Block. The failure
types and which analog values they are associated with are described in the ta-
ble below. Both signals are available in DNP and Modbus.
Point Value Condition
0 Normal
1 Alarm
2 Block
3 Alarm has evolved to block
The Alarm condition is allowed to reset if the continuous dc level drops below
the pickup level. The Block condition has no reset level. If power is cycled to
the relay it will go into its normal state until the continuous dc level is detected
again.

Self Check Fail appears as "Aux. Failure Alarm" in the settings ver-
sions before V 10.

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication
Protocol
The SCADA port supports DNP3 and Modicon Modbus protocols. All meter-
ing values available through the terminal user interface are also available via
the Modbus protocol. Additionally, the Modbus protocol supports the reading
of unit time and time of the readings and provides access to trip and alarm
events, including fault location information.
A “Hold Readings” function is available to freeze all metering readings into a
snapshot (see Force Single Coil function, address 0).
Read Coil Status (Function Code 01)
Channel Address Value
Hold Readings 1 0: Readings not held 1: Readings held
Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved
Output Contact 1 513 0: Contact Open (inactive) 1: Contact Closed (active)
21P1 Trip 769 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51 Trip 773 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50 Trip 774 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
21N1 Trip 775 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 Out of Step 779 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ZCircle Trigger 780 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51N Trip 781 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix E-1

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol
50N Trip 782 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
46-51 Trip 783 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Deadline Trip 785 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Comm Scheme Trip 786 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Comm Scheme Send 787 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
60 Alarm 788 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
21P2 Alarm 789 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
21N2 Alarm 792 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51 Alarm 795 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51N Alarm 796 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
46-51 Alarm 797 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Self Check Fail 798 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ProLogic1 799 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 OutBlinder Alarm 809 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 InBlinder Alarm 810 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
27 Main Trip 811 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
27 Aux Trip 812 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59 Main Trip 813 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

59 Aux Trip 814 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50LS Main 815 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
25/27/59 Sync Check 816 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50LS Aux 817 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Group Logic 1 818 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Initiated 834 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Appendix E-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

79 Blocked 835 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF-1 Main 836 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF-2 Main 837 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF-1 Aux 838 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF-2 Aux 839 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Main Reclose 840 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Aux Reclose 841 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Lead Lockout 842 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Follow Lockout 843 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF Initiate 848 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ProLogic 11 849 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ProLogic 12 850 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Read Input Status (Function Code 02)
Channel Address Value
External Input 1 10001 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

External Input 1 Change of state latch 10257 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Input Status (Function Code 02)
Virtual Input 1 10513 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Holding Registers (Function Code 03)
Channel Address Units Scale
L-PRO Clock Time (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds Now 40001 0 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40002 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40003 0-59 1
Hours Now 40004 0-23 1

Read Holding Registers (Function Code 03)
Day of Year Now 40005 1-365 (up to 366 if leap 1

year)
Years since 1900 40006 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40007 0: No 1: Yes 1
Time of Acquisition (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds Now 40008 0 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40009 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40010 0-59 1
Hours Now 40011 0-23 1
Day of Year Now 40012 1-365 (up to 366 if leap 1

year)
Years since 1900 40013 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40014 0: No 1: Yes 1
Offset of UTC to IED time. 40015 2’s complement half 1

hours, North America is
negative
Line Va Magnitude 40257 KV 10
Line Va Angle 40258 Degrees 10
Line Vb Magnitude 40259 KV 10
Line Vb Angle 40260 Degrees 10
Line Vc Magnitude 40261 KV 10
Line Vc Angle 40262 Degrees 10
Line Ia Magnitude 40263 A 1
Line Ia Angle 40264 Degrees 10
Line Ib Magnitude 40265 A 1
Line Ib Angle 40266 Degrees 10
Line Ic Magnitude 40267 A 1
Line Ic Angle 40268 Degrees 10
I2a Magnitude 40269 A 1
I2a Angle 40270 Degrees 10
I2b Magnitude 40271 A 1
I2b Angle 40272 Degrees 10
I2c Magnitude 40273 A 1
I2c Angle 40274 Degrees 10

Bus Va Magnitude 40287 KV 10
Bus Va Angle 40288 Degrees 10
Bus Vb Magnitude 40289 KV 10
Bus Vb Angle 40290 Degrees 10
Bus Vc Magnitude 40291 KV 10
Bus Vc Angle 40292 Degrees 10
Not used 40293
Not used 40294
Not used 40295
Not used 40296
Not used 40297
Not used 40298
Not used 40299
Not used 40300
Not used 40301
Not used 40302
Not used 40303
Not used 40304
PosSeq Frequency 40305 Hz 100
P 40306 MW 10
Q 40307 Mvar 10
Pos Seq Voltage 40308 KV 10
Pos Seq Current 40309 A 1
Active Setting Group Number 40310
Ia summated Magnitude 40311 A 1
Ia summated Angle 40312 degrees 10
Ib summated Magnitude 40313 A 1
Ib summated Angle 40314 degrees 10
Ic summated Magnitude 40315 A 1
Ic summated Angle 40316 degrees 10
Self check fail parameter 40317 N/A 1
Read Input Register (Function Code 04)
No input registers supported. Response from IED indicates “ILLEGAL FUNCTION.”
Force Single Coil (Function Code 05)
Only the “hold readings” coil can be forced. When active, this coil locks all coil, input and holding register readings simultaneously
at their present values. When inactive, coil, input and holding register values will read their most recently available state.
Channel Type Address Value
Hold Readings Read/Write 01 0000: Readings update normally (inactive)

FF00: Hold readings (active)

Preset Single Register (Function Code 06)
Channel Address Value Scaled Up By
Event Message Control (See below for details of use)
Refresh event list 40513 No data required N/A
Acknowledge the cur- 40514 No data required N/A

rent event and get the
next event
Get the next event 40515 No data required N/A

(without acknowl-
edge)
Event Buffer Size 100
Self Check Fail 40317 N/A 1

Parameter
Diagnostic Subfunctions (Function Code 08)
Return Query Data (Subfunction 00) This provides an echo of the submitted message.
Restart Comm. Option (Subfunction 01) This restarts the Modbus communications process.
Force Listen Only Mode (Subfunction 04) No response is returned. IED enters “Listen Only” mode. This
mode can only be exited by the “Restart Comm. Option” com-
mand.
Report Slave ID (Function Code 17/0x11)
A fixed response is returned by the IED, including system model, version and issue numbers.
Channel Type Bytes Value
Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 0 x 0834 = 2100 decimal
Version Number Read Only 2 and 3 Version number
Issue Number Read Only 4 and 5 Issue number
• The L-PRO IED model number is 2100.

• Version and issue will each be positive integers, say X and Y.
• The L-PRO is defined as “Model 2100, Version X Issue Y”

Accessing L-PRO Event Information
All L-PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus. This includes fault location information.
The following controls are available.
Refresh Event List (Function Code 6, address 40513): Fetches the latest events from the L-PRO's event log and
makes them available for Modbus access. The most recent event becomes the current event
available for reading.
Acknowledge Current Event and (Function Code 6, address 40514): Clears the current event from the read registers and
Get Next Event places the next event into them. An acknowledged event is no longer available for reading.
Get Next Event (Function Code 6, address 40515): Places the next event in the read registers without
acknowledging the current event. The current event will reappear in the list when Refresh
Event List is used.
Size of Current Event Message (Function Code 3, address 40516): Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to contain
the current event. Event data is stored with 2 characters per register. A reading of zero indi-
cates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current set. (NB. The Refresh
Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred since the last
Refresh Event List.)
Fault Location Event (Function Code 3, address 40517): Identifies fault location events. These events are identified
by “FL” in this register. Non-fault location events contain “” in this location.
Read Event Message (Function Code 3, addresses 40518 – 40570): Contains the current message. Two.
ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register. All unused registers in the set are set to
0.
Fault Information – Type (Function Code 3, address 40571): If the current event is a fault location event, this register
contains the type of fault.
The following type bitmap:
0x0001 – Phase A
0x0002 – Phase B
0x0004 – Phase C
0x0008 – Ground
Any number of the flags may be set for a given fault. If the relay could not determine the fault
type, then the register will not have any flags set and will read 0x0000.
Fault Information – Fault Dis- (Function Code 3, address 40572): If the current event is a fault location event, this register
tance contains the distance to the fault. It is scaled up by a factor of 10. The units are the same as
the units set in the relay configuration.
Fault Information – Time of (Function Code 3, addresses 40573 to 40576): If the current event is a fault location event,
Fault these registers contain the time of the fault in seconds since 1970. Each of these 16-bit regis-
ters contains an 8-bit portion of a 32-bit time value. Register 40573 contains the upper most 8
bits, and register 40576 contains the lowest 8 bits.
Modbus Event Message Example
"FL2000Sep21 20:16:16.966 21P1 AB 1.0km: Trip"
Register Value Meaning
High Byte Low Byte
40516 0x00 0x1B Event text size = 27 (0x1B hex)
40517 0x46 0x4C ‘FL’ - Fault locator event

Modbus Event Message Example
"FL2000Sep21 20:16:16.966 21P1 AB 1.0km: Trip"
Register Value Meaning
40518 0x32 0x30 ‘2’, ‘0’
40519 0x30 0x30 ‘0’, ‘0’
40520 0x53 0x65 ‘S’, ‘e’
40521 0x70 0x32 ‘p’, ‘2’
40522 0x31 0x20 ‘1’, ‘<sp>’
40523 0x32 0x30 ‘2’, ‘0’
40524 0x3A 0x31 ‘:’, ‘1’
40525 0x36 0x3A ‘6’, ‘:’
40526 0x31 0x36 ‘1’, ‘6’
40527 0x2E 0x39 ‘.’, ‘9’
40528 0x36 0x36 ‘6’, ‘6’
40529 0x20 0x32 ‘<sp>’, ‘2’
40530 0x31 0x50 ‘ 1’, ‘P’
40531 0x31 0x20 ‘1’, ‘<sp>‘
40532 0x41 0x42 ’A’, ’B’
40533 0x20 0x31 ’<sp>’, ’ 1’
40534 0x2E 0x30 ’.’, ’0’
40535 0x6B 0x6D ’K’, ’m’
40536 0x3A 0x20 ’:’, ’<sp>’
40537 0x54 0x72 ‘T’, ‘r’
40538 0x69 0x70 ‘i’, ‘p’

Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile
Device Properties Unless otherwise noted, multiple boxes in the second column below should be
selected for each parameter to indicate all capabilities supported or required.
Parameters without checkboxes in the second column do not have capabilities
and are included so the current value may be shown in the third column.
The items listed in the capabilities column below may be configurable to any
of the options selected, or set to a fixed value when the device was designed.
Item 1.1.10 contains a list of abbreviations for the possible ways in which the
configurable parameters may be set. Since some parameters may not be acces-
sible by each of these methods supported, an abbreviation for the configuration
methods supported by each parameter is shown in the fourth column of the ta-
bles below.
This document may be used to show the device capabilities, the current value
of each parameter, or both. If it is used to show the current values, the third col-
umn should be filled in even if a fixed parameter is selected in the capabilities
section ("NA" may be entered for parameters that are Not Applicable).
If this document is used to show the current value of each parameter, the "Cur-
rent Value" column applies to a single connection between a master and out-
station.
If configurable,
1.1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.1.1 Device Function:  Master  Master

 Outstation  Outstation
1.1.2 Vendor Name: NxtPhase T&D

Corporation
1.1.3 Device Name: L-PRO 2100
1.1.4 Device manufacturer's NA

hardware version string:
1.1.5 Device manufacturer's NA

software version string:
1.1.6 Device Profile V1.0, October

Document Version 26, 2007
Number:
1.1.7 DNP Levels Supported Masters Only

for: RequestsResponses
None
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Outstations Only
Requests and Responses
None
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F-1

If configurable,
list methods
1.1.8 Supported Function  Self-Address Reservation

Blocks:  Object 0 - attribute objects
 Data Sets
 File Transfer
 Virtual Terminal
 Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in
a DNP3 XML file
1.1.9 Notable Additions: • Start-stop (qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01), limited
quantity (qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08) and indi-
ces (qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28) for Binary In-
puts, Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs (object
groups 1, 10 and 30)
• 32-bit and 16-bit Analog Inputs with and without
flag (variations 1, 2, 3 and 4)
• Analog Input events with time (variations 3 and 4)
• Fault Location information as analog readings
• Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and
111
1.1.10 Methods to set  XML - Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer

Configurable  XML - Loaded via other transport mechanism
Parameters:  Terminal - ASCII Terminal Command Line
 Software - Vendor software named
L-PRO Offliner
 Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer
 Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech-
anism
 Direct - Keypad on device front panel
 Factory - Specified when device is ordered
 Protocol - Set via DNP3 (e.g. assign class)
 Other - explain _________________
1.1.11 DNP3 XML files RdWrFilenameDescription of Contents Not supported

available On-Line:
 dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
 dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
 dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config. val-
ues
  _____*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configurable
methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
Appendix F-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

If configurable,
list methods
1.1.12 External DNP3 XML Rd WrFilenameDescription of Not supported

files available Off-line: Contents
  dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
  dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
  dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config. val-
ues
  _______*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configurable
methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
1.1.13 Connections  Serial (complete section 1.2)

Supported:  IP Networking (complete section 1.3)
 Other, explain ______________________

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.1 Port Name Port 3
1.2.2 Serial Connection  Asynchronous - 8 Data Bits, 1 Start Bit, 1 Stop Not configured L-PRO Offliner
Parameters: Bit, No Parity for DNP
 Other, explain - Asynchronous with selectable
parity
1.2.3 Baud Rate:  Fixed at _______ Not configured L-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range _______ to _______ for DNP
 Configurable, selectable from 300, 1200, 2400,
9600, 19200, 38400 and 57600
 Configurable, other, describe_______________
1.2.4 Hardware Flow Control  None

(Handshaking): RS-232 / V.24 / V.28 Options:
Describe hardware signaling Before Tx, Asserts: RTS
requirements of the interface.  DTR
Where a transmitter or receiver Before Rx, Asserts: RTS
is inhibited until a given control  DTR
signal is asserted, it is consid- Always Asserts:  RTS
ered to require that signal prior  DTR
to sending or receiving charac- Before Tx, Requires: AssertedDeasserted
ters.  CTS
Where a signal is asserted prior  DCD
to transmitting, that signal will  DSR
be maintained active until after  RI
the end of transmission.  Rx Inactive
Where a signal is asserted to Before Rx, Requires: AssertedDeasserted
enable reception, any data sent  CTS
to the device when the signal is  DCD
not active could be discarded.  DSR
 RI
Always Ignores:
 CTS
 DCD
 DSR
 RI
 Other, explain ____________

RS-422 / V.11 Options:
 Requires Indication before Rx
 Asserts Control before Tx
RS-485 Options:
 Requires Rx inactive before Tx
1.2.5 Interval to Request Link  Not Supported

Status:  Fixed at_________ seconds
 Configurable, range _____ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable from __,__,__ seconds
 Configurable, other, describe______________
1.2.6 Supports DNP3  No

Collision Avoidance:  Yes, explain ______________________

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.7 Receiver Inter-  Not checked

character Timeout:  No gap permitted
 Fixed at _____ bit times
 Fixed at _____ ms
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ bit times
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ ms
 Configurable, Selectable from __,__,__bit times
 Configurable, Selectable from ___, ___, ___ ms
 Variable, explain ____
1.2.8 Inter-character gaps in  None (always transmits with no inter-character

transmission: gap)
 Maximum _____ bit times
 Maximum _____ ms

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.1 Port Name Port 5 Network
1.3.2 Type of End Point:  TCP Initiating (Master Only) Not configured L-PRO Offliner
 TCP Listening (Outstation Only) for DNP
 TCP Dual (required for Masters)
 UDP Datagram (required)
1.3.3 IP Address of this 192.168.100.10 L-PRO Mainte-

Device: 1 nance utilities
1.3.4 Subnet Mask: Not set L-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.5 Gateway IP Address: Not set L-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.6 Accepts TCP  Allows all (show as *.*.*.* in 1.3.7) Limits based on L-PRO Offliner
Connections or UDP  Limits based on an IP address an IP address
Datagrams from:  Limits based on list of IP addresses
 Limits based on a wildcard IP address
 Limits based on list of wildcard IP addresses
 Other validation, explain_________________
1.3.7 IP Address(es) from 192.168.1.1 L-PRO Offliner

which TCP Connections
or UDP Datagrams are
accepted:
1.3.8 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Master w/o dual end point) 20,000 L-PRO Offliner
Number:  Fixed at 20,000
 Configurable, range 1025 to 32737
 Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.3.9 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Outstation w/o dual end point) NA
Number of remote  Fixed at 20,000
device:  Configurable, range _______ to _______
1.3.10 TCP Keep-alive timer:  Fixed at ___________ms Disabled L-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range 5 to 3,600 s
 Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.3.11 Local UDP port:  Fixed at 20,000 20,000 L-PRO Offliner

 Let system choose (Master only)
1.3.12 Destination UDP port NA

for DNP3 Requests
(Master Only):
1.3.13 Destination UDP port  None NA

for initial unsolicited null  Fixed at 20,000
responses (UDP only  Configurable, range _______ to _______
Outstations):  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.14 Destination UDP port  None 20,000 L-PRO Offliner

for responses:  Fixed at 20,000
 Use source port number
1.3.15 Multiple master  Supports multiple masters (Outstations only) Method 1 (based L-PRO Offliner
connections If supported, the following methods may be used: on IP address)
(Outstations Only):  Method 1 (based on IP address) - required
 Method 2 (based on IP port number) -
recommended
 Method 3 (browsing for static data) - optional
1.3.16 Time synchronization  DNP3 LAN procedure (function code 24)

support:  DNP3 Write Time (not recommended over LAN)
 Other, explain _________________________
 Not Supported

If configurable,
1.4 Link Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.4.1 Data Link Address:  Fixed at______ 1 L-PRO Offliner

1.4.2 DNP3 Source Address  Never

Validation:  Always, one address allowed (shown in 1.4.3)
 Always, any one of multiple addresses allowed
 (each selectable as shown in 1.4.3)
 Sometimes, explain________________
1.4.3 DNP3 Source  Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA

Address(es) expected Address value
when Validation is  Configurable, range _______ to _______
Enabled:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.4.4 Self Address Support  Yes (only allowed if configurable) NA

using address 0xFFFC:  No
1.4.5 Sends Confirmed User  Always L-PRO Offliner

Data Frames:  Sometimes, explain _____________________ (to disable, set
 Never Data Link Time-
 Configurable, either always or never out to 0)
1.4.6 Data Link Layer  None 2,000

Confirmation Timeout:  Fixed at 2,000 ms
 Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
 Variable, explain _______________________
1.4.7 Maximum Data Link  Never Retries 3

Retries:  Fixed at 3
 Configurable, range ________ to _______
1.4.8 Maximum number of  Fixed at 292 292

octets Transmitted in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Data Link Frame:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in a Data Link  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Frame:  Configurable, other, describe______________

If configurable,
1.5 Application Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment other than  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:
1.5.2 Maximum number of  Fixed at ___________ NA

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment containing  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in an  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Application Layer  Configurable, other, describe______________
Fragment:
1.5.4 Timeout waiting for  None 2,000 ms

Complete Application  Fixed at 2,000 ms
Layer Fragment:  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
single control request  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
for CROB (group 12):  Configurable, other, describe______________
1.5.6 Maximum number of  Fixed at _ Analog Outputs

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ not supported
for Analog Outputs  Configurable, other, describe______________
(group 41):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.7 Maximum number of  Fixed at __ Data Sets not

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ supported
for Data Sets (groups  Configurable, other, describe______________
85,86,87):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.8 Supports mixing object  Not applicable - controls are not supported Analog Outputs
groups (AOBs, CROBs  Yes not supported
and Data Sets) in the  No
same control request:

1.6 Fill Out The Following

If configurable,
Items For Outstations Capabilities Current Value
list methods
Only
1.6.1 Timeout waiting for  None 5,000 ms

Application Confirm of  Fixed at 5,000 ms
solicited response  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
message:  Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.6.2 How often is time  Never needs time

synchronization  Within ______ seconds after IIN1.4 is set
required from the  Periodically every _______ seconds
master?
1.6.3 Device Trouble Bit  Never used

IIN1.6:  Reason for setting: Unable to access requested
data or execute CROB, assuming a valid
request has been received
1.6.4 File Handle Timeout:  Not applicable, files not supported

 Fixed at______ ms
 Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
1.6.5 Event Buffer Overflow  Discard the oldest event

Behaviour:  Discard the newest event
 Other, explain _________________________
1.6.6 Event Buffer • Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32, size
Organization: 200.
• Separate buffer for the Object Group 111, size
100.
• Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events, size
100.
1.6.7 Sends Multi-Fragment  Yes

Responses:  No
1.6.8 DNP Command  Assign Class Not supported

Settings preserved  Analog Deadbands
through a device reset:  Data Set Prototypes
 Data Set Descriptors

1.7 Outstation Unsolicited If configurable,

Capabilities Current Value
Response Support list methods
1.7.1 Supports Unsolicited  Not Supported NA

Reporting:  Configurable, selectable from On and Off

If configurable,
1.8 Outstation Performance Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.8.1 Maximum Time Base NA, not synchro-

Drift (milliseconds per nized by DNP
minute):
1.8.2 When does outstation  Never NA

set IIN1.4?  Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza-
tion request received
 Periodically, range ____to____ seconds
 Periodically, selectable from ____,____,___
seconds
 Range ____to____ seconds after last time sync
 Selectable from___,___,___seconds after last
time sync
 When time error may have drifted by range
____to____ ms
 When time error may have drifted by selectable
from ____,____,___
1.8.3 Maximum Internal Time NA

Reference Error when
set via DNP (ms):
1.8.4 Maximum Delay NA

Measurement error
(ms):
1.8.5 Maximum Response 100 ms (for the L-PRO Offliner

time (ms): case all sup-
ported points
mapped to the
DNP point lists)
1.8.6 Maximum time from NA

start-up to IIN 1.4
assertion (ms):
1.8.7 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1736 ms for

tag error for local Binary 60Hz sys-
and Double-bit I/O (ms): tems
• 0.2083 ms for
50 Hz sys-
tems
1.8.8 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1736 ms for

tag error for local I/O 60Hz sys-
other than Binary and tems
Double-bit data types • 0.2083 ms for
(ms): 50 Hz sys-
tems

Capabilities and The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each
Current Settings for DNP3 data type. Each data type also provides a table defining the data points
Device Database
(Outstation Only) available in the device or a description of how this information can be obtained
if the database is configurable.
2.1 Single-Bit Binary Inputs If configurable,

Static (Steady-State) Group Number: 1 Capabilities Current Value
Event Group Number: 2
list methods
2.1.1 Static Variation reported  Variation 1 - Single-bit Packed format

when variation 0  Variation 2 - Single-bit with flag
requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - with relative time
 Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.1.4 Binary Inputs included  Always L-PRO Offliner

in Class 0 response:  Never
 Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.1.5 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Default list is L-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in the
 Other, explain_____________________ table below
1. Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution.
NOTES 2. Binary Input data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Binary Input point selection can be obtained through the L-
PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Default Class Name for Name for

Point
Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description
Index
(1, 2, 3 or none) value is 0 value is 1
0 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active


Point
Index
9 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active


Point
Index
39 Fault Information Available 1 Inactive Active

2.2 Binary Output Status

And Control Relay
Output Block If configurable,
Binary Output Status Group Number: 10 Capabilities Current Value
Binary Output Event Group Number: 11 list methods
CROB Group Number: 12
Binary Output Command Event Object
Num: 13
2.2.1 Minimum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.2 Maximum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.3 Binary Output Status  Always

included in Class 0  Never
response:  Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.2.4 Reports Output  Never Not supported

Command Event  Only upon a successful Control
Objects:  Upon all control attempts
2.2.5 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time Not supported L-PRO Offliner
reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.6 Command Event  Variation 1 - without time Not supported L-PRO Offliner
Variation reported when  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
variation 0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.7 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent Not supported L-PRO Offliner
 All events (See Note 2
below)
2.2.8 Command Event  Only most recent Not supported

reporting mode:  All events
2.2.9 Maximum Time  Not Applicable 10 s

between Select and  Fixed at 10 seconds
Operate:  Configurable, range ______ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable
from___,___,___seconds
below)
2.2.10 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Default list is L-PRO Offliner
Output Status/Control  Configurable shown in the
relay output block  Other, explain_____________________ table below
(CROB) Point List:

1. Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Events are not supported for Binary Outputs (group 10), but most of Binary
Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs (group 2) with full Event and Class
Data support. See L-PRO Offliner/DNP Configuration/Point Map screen for com-
plete point lists and configuration options.
NOTES
3. Virtual Inputs (default Binary Output points 94-123) can be used to control re-
lay output contacts. See L-PRO Offliner/Setting Group X/Output Matrix screen
for configuration options.
4. Binary Output data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the
L-PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Default Class
Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events
(1, 2, 3 or none)
Cancel Currently Running Operation
Direct Operate - No Ack
Name for Name for

Name State when State when Change Command Description
value is 0 value is 1
Latch Off / NUL
Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
0 Output contact 1 - - - - - - - - - - - Open Closed None None
14 21P1 Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
18 51 Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
19 50 Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
20 21N1 Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
24 68 Out of Step - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
25 Zcircle Trigger - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
26 51N Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
27 50N Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
28 46-51 Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
30 Deadline Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
31 Comm Scheme - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Trip
32 Comm Scheme - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Send
33 60 Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
34 21P2 Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
37 21N2 Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
40 51 Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
41 51N Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
42 46-51 Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
43 Self Check Fail - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
44 68 OutBlinder - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Alarm
45 68 InBlinder Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
46 27 Main Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
47 27 Aux Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
48 59 Main Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
49 59 Aux Trip - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
50 50LS Main - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
51 25/27/59 Sync - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Check
52 ProLogic 1 - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
62 50LS Aux - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
63 Group Logic 1 - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
79 79 Initiated - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
80 79 Blocked - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
81 50BF-1 Main - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
82 50BF-2 Main - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
83 50BF-1 Aux - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
84 50BF-2 Aux - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
85 79 Main Reclose - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
86 79 Aux Reclose - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
87 79 Lead Lockout - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
88 79 Follow Lockout - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
93 50BF Initiate - - - - - - - - - - - Inactive Active None None
94 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y Y - Y Y - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
at 1 s
124 Get Next Fault Y Y Y Y - Y Y - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed
Event at 1 s
125 Output Contact 15 - - - - - - - - - - - Open Closed None None

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip

2.3 Analog Input Points If configurable,

list methods
2.3.1 Static Variation reported  Variation 1 - 32-bit with flag

when variation 0  Variation 2 - 16-bit with flag
requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit without flag
 Variation 4 - 16-bit without flag
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point with
flag
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point with
flag
below)
2.3.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - 32-bit without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - 16-bit without time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit with time
 Variation 4 - 16-bit with time
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 7 - single-precision floating point with
time
 Variation 8 - double-precision floating point with
time
below)
2.3.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.3.4 Analog Inputs Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.3.5 How Deadbands are  A. Global Fixed L-PRO Offliner

set:  B. Configurable through DNP
 C. Configurable via other means
 D. Other, explain ________________________
 Based on point Index - column specifies which
of the options applies, B, C, or D
2.3.6 Analog Deadband  Simple

Algorithm:  Integrating
simple - just compares the difference from  Other, explain __________________________
the previous reported value
2.3.7 Definition of Analog  Fixed, list shown in table below Default list is L-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in table
 Other, explain_____________________ below

1. Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec-
ondary voltage * PT ratio for voltage channels, and either 1 A or 5A secondary
current * CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT installed
NOTES
in the L-PRO.
3. Analog Input data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the L-
PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Transmitted Valuea Scalingb

Point Index
Default Class
Assigned to Multiplier Resolutiond
Name
Events
Minimum Maximumc (default/ (range))
Offset Units (default/ Description
(1, 2, 3 or none) maximal)
0 Line Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
1 Line Va Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
2 Line Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
3 Line Vb Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
4 Line Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
5 Line Vc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
6 Line Ia Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
7 Line Ia Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
8 Line Ib Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
9 Line Ib Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
10 Line Ic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
11 Line Ic Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
12 I2a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
13 I2a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
14 I2b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
15 I2b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
16 I2c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
17 I2c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
19 I3a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
21 I3b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
23 I3c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
25 I4a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
27 I4b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
29 I4c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
30 Bus Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
31 Bus Va Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
32 Bus Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001

Point Index Transmitted Valuea Scalingb
Default Class
Name
Events
33 Bus Vb Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
34 Bus Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
35 Bus Vc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
36 Pos Seq Fre- 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.001 - 1.0) 0.0 Hz 0.01 / 0.001
quency
37 P 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
38 Q 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
39 Pos Seq Voltage 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 KV 0.1 / 0.00001
40 Pos Seq Current 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
41 Not used 2 0 0 1.0 0.0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica-

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions

tions
53 Active Setting 2 1 8 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

Group Number
54 Fault Information - 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0 See description below on

DNP Time (High 16 how to access Fault Informa-
bits) tion.
55 Fault Information - 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

DNP Time (Middle
16 bits)
56 Fault Information - 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

DNP Time (Low 16
bits)
57 Fault Information - 2 0 Configurable 0.1 0.0 Configura- 0.1

Fault Distance ble
58 Fault Information - 2 0 15 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

Type
59 Ia Summated Mag- 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01

nitude
60 Ia Summated 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
Angle
61 Ib Summated Mag- 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01

nitude
62 Ib Summated 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
Angle
63 Ic Summated Mag- 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01

nitude
64 Ic Summated 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01
Angle
Point Index Transmitted Valuea Scalingb
Default Class
Name
Events
65 Self check Fail 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0
a. The minimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and highest values that the outstation will report in DNP analog input
objects. These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers. If the outstation is capable of transmitting both integers
and floating-point, then integer and floating-point values are required for the minimums and maximums.
For example, a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa. The outstation provides a linear conversion of the sensor's output
signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating-point values of 0 to 500.000. The sensor and outstation are used in an ap-
plication where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa. For this input, the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 /
0.0 and the maximum transmitted value would be stated as 19000 / 380.000.
b. The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations (16 bit and 32 bit) is converted to engi-
neering units when received by the Master (i.e. scaled according to the equation: scaled value = multiplier * raw + offset). Scaling
is not applied to Floating point variations since they are already transmitted in engineering units.
c. Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given in the units shown in the
previous column. This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measurement.
d. Maximal values are calculated as (2 * Configured Nominal / Multiplier) for voltage channels and as (20 * Configured Nominal /
Multiplier) for current channels (see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions).
When a fault location event is available, Binary Input "Fault Information

Available" (default point index 39) is asserted while there are still fault loca-
tion events in the buffer (size 100). When a Pulse or Latch is received for the
Binary Output "Get Next Fault Event" (default point index 124, previous state
is not important), fault event information is put into the Analog Inputs. If there
is no fault location event available when the Binary Output is pulsed, the fault
type is set to zero.
Not all fault location events are reported trough DNP. In a burst of fault loca-
tions from a fault, only the first processed event is available through DNP, all
other events within the following 100 ms interval are ignored. Outside 100 ms
from the processed fault location event, the system accepts another fault loca-
tion event and performs the same filtering. In addition, only fault location
events generated by trip elements are available.
2.4 Octet String Points If configurable,

list methods
2.4.1 Event reporting mode *:  Only most recent

 All events
2.4.2 Octet Strings Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.4.3 Definition of Octet  Fixed, list shown in table below

String Point List:  Configurable (current list may be shown in table
below)
 Other, explain Used for Event Log access as
described below

* Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the
Event Log text of the relay. Object 110 always contains the most recent event
in the relay. Object 111 is the corresponding change event object.
As stated in the DNP specifications, the variation of the response object repre-
sents the length of the string. The string represents the ASCII values of the
event text. The first two characters in the string can be used to quickly identify
fault location events. Fault locator events begin with the characters "FL"
(0x46, 0x4C hex). The following example shows a fault distance event re-
turned through either of the octet string objects:
Event Message:
FL2000Sep21 20:16:16.966: 21P1 AB 1.0km: Trip
DNP Octet string object components:
0x46 0x4C 0x32 0x30 0x30 030x
0x53 0x65 0x70 0x32 0x31 0x20
0x32 0x30 0x3A 0x31 0x36 0x3A
0x31 0x36 0x2E 0x39 0x36 0x36
0x20 0x32 0x31 0x50 0x31 0x20
0x41 0x42 0x20 0x31 0x2E 0x30
0x6B 0x6D 0x3A 0x20 0x54 0x72
0x69 0x70

Implementation The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia-
Table tions, function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re-
sponses. The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a
Master, or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation. The Response col-
umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master, or all responses
that may be sent by an Outstation.
The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth-
er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro-
cedures. Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is
NOTES
indicated by highlighted rows. Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation
or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough (note these Object
Groups will still be parsed).
Request Response
DNP Object Group & Variation
Outstation parses Outstation can issue
Group Var Function Codes Function Codes

Description Qualifier Codes (hex) Qualifier Codes (hex)
Num Num (dec) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input - Packed format 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input - With flags 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 1 Binary Input Event - Without time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 2 Binary Input Event - With absolute 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 3 Binary Input Event - With relative 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
10 0 Binary Output - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output - Output Status with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
flag 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Binary Command - Control relay 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
output block (CROB) 4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)

Request Response

Num Num (dec) (dec)
20 0 Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)

7 (freeze)
8 ( freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 1 Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 2 Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 5 Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 6 Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
21 1 Frozen Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 2 Frozen Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 9 Frozen Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 10 Frozen Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 0 Counter Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

22 1 Counter Event - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
22 2 Counter Event - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
30 0 Analog Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 Analog Input - 32-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 Analog Input - 16-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 Analog Input - 32-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 Analog Input - 16-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 1 Analog Input Event - 32-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 2 Analog Input Event - 16-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 3 Analog Input Event - 32-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 4 Analog Input Event - 16-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status - Any Varia- 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
tion

Request Response

Num Num (dec) (dec)
40 2 Analog Output Status - 16-bit with 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

flag
41 2 Analog Output - 16-bit 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)
50 1 Time and Date - Absolute time 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 (response)
51 1 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
51 2 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
52 1 Time Delay - Coarse 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
52 2 Time delay - Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
60 1 Class Objects - Class 0 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
60 2 Class Objects - Class 1 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
80 1 Internal Indications - Packet format 2 (write) 00 (start-stop) 129 (response)

(index = 7)
110 0 Octet string 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
111 0 Octet string event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) 129 (response)

D02333R05.00
(17.17")
436.1 mm
Top View

Figure G.1: Mechanical Drawing – 3U Chassis
(.25")
(.34") (18.31") 6.4 mm
8.7 mm 465.1 mm
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings

Model 2100 IRIG-B Functional
Target
Date & View View Clear Service Required

133.4 mm Test Mode
120.7 mm 130.8 mm
(5.25") (4.75") (5.15")
Alarm
Side View
Port 1
ø 6.4 mm 288.8 mm
482.6 mm (.25") (11.37")
(19.00")
307.9 mm
(12.12")
Appendix G-1
Appendix G-2
Cut Out Template
(18.31")
465.1 mm
(17.19")
436.6 mm

Figure G.2: Cut-out Template – 3U Chassis
131.3 mm CL 120.7 mm
(5.17") (4.75")
ø 6.4 mm
(.25")
5.3 mm
232.6 mm 14.2 mm (.21")
(9.16") (.56")
D02333R05.00
D02333R05.00
(17.17")
436.1 mm
Top View

Figure G.3: Mechanical Drawing – 4U Chassis
307.9 mm
(12.12")
(.34") (18.31") (.25") 288.8 mm
6.4 mm (11.37")
8.7 mm 465.1 mm
Relay Functional
L-PRO
IRIG-B Functional
Model 2100
Target
Date & View View Service Required

Clear
177.8mm 165.1mm 175
Test Mode (
(7.00") (6.50")
Alarm
Port 1
Side View
ø 6.4 mm
482 6 mm ( 25")
Appendix G-3
Appendix G-4
Cut Out Template
(18.31")
465.1 mm
(17.19")
436.6 mm

Figure G.4: Cut-out Template – 4U Chassis
175.8 mm 165.1 mm
(6.92") C
L (6.50")
ø 6.4 mm
(.25")
5.3 mm
232.6 mm 14.2 mm (.21")
(9.16") (.56")
D02333R05.00
Top View
307.9 mm
(12.12")
161.9 mm
(6.38")
L-PRO
Model 2100
Relay Functional
IRIG-B Functional
Service Required
432.1 mm
(17.01")
482.6 mm
(19.00")
Side View 436.2 mm
(17.18")
Test Mode
Alarm
Date & View View Previous Next

Time Readings Logs
Target
Clear
Target
PORT 1
13.0 mm 15.6 mm
(.51") (.62")
6.4 mm 120.7 mm 6.4 mm 307.9 mm
(.25") (4.75") (.25") (12.12")
Figure G.5: Vertical Mount Mechanical Drawing – 3U Chassis
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix G-5

5.3 mm (.21") 9.0 mm 11.6 mm (.46")

120.7 mm (.36")
(4.75")
ø 6.4 mm 2.4 mm
(.25") (.09")
14.2 mm
(.56")
Holes for Vertical Mount
4 places ø 6.4 mm(ø 0.25")
New Installation Retrofit

Cut Out Template Installation
ABB Type FT42 Cutout

(ref. ABB dwg 57D7905)
465.1 mm 436.6 mm CL CL
(18.31") (17.19")
131.3 mm
(5.17")
232.6 mm
(9.16")
(.09")
2.4 mm
Figure G.6: Vertical Mount Cut-out Template – 3U Chassis
Appendix G-6 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

D02333R05.00
PORT 5 IRIG-B PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4
External 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC
SCADA
Unused Direct / Modem Unused
Inputs
+ 1 - + 2 - + 3 - + 4 - + 5 - + 6 - + 7 - + 8 - + 9 -
Figure H.1: Rear Panel – 3U Chassis

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117

Output Unused
Relay Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 Out 5 Out 6 Out 7 Out 8 Out 9 Out 10 Out 11 Out 12 Out 13 Out 14
Contacts Inoperative
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
Power Nominal
48 - 250 Vdc
Case Gnd
Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
Appendix H-1
Appendix H-2
125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC PORT 5 IRIG-B PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4
External SCADA
Inputs
+ 1 - + 2 - + 3 - + 4 - + 5 - + 6 - + 7 - + 8 - + 9 -
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
External 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC Output Contacts
Inputs Out 15 Out 16 Out 17 Out 18 Out 19 Out 20 Out 21
+ 10 - + 11 - + 12 - + 13 - + 14 - + 15 - + 16 - + 17 - + 18 - + 19 - + 20 -
Figure H.2: Rear Panel – 4U Chassis

400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435
Output Unused
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
Power Nominal
48 - 250 Vdc
Case Gnd
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
D02333R05.00
D02333R05.00
PORT 5 IRIG-B PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4
External 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC 125VDC
SCADA
Inputs
+ 1 - + 2 - + 3 - + 4 - + 5 - + 6 - + 7 - + 8 - + 9 -
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
Output Unused
Top
Bottom

200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
Power Nominal
48 - 250 Vdc
Case Gnd
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
Figure H.3: Rear Panel - Vertical Mount – 3U Chassis

Overhang
Front Panel
Appendix H-3
D02333R05.00
Bus A
Line Breaker
A Line CTs Protected Line
A
B 52-1 B
C C
Line Breaker
Aux AC
Figure I.1: L-PRO AC Schematic

52-2
PTs
Main AC
PTs

Bus A Bus B
Appendix I AC Schematic Drawings
IA 1 IA 1 IB 1 IB 1 IC 1 IC 1 IA 2 IA 2 IB 2 IB 2 IC 2 IC 2 IA 3 IA 3 IB 3 IB 3 IC 3 IC 3 IA 4 IA 4 IB 4 IB 4 IC 4 IC 4 VA VB VC N Spare VA VB VC N
300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333
Main AC Aux AC CT Input #3 CT Input #4 Aux Main

Line Currents Line Currents AC Volts AC Volts
AC Current Inputs
Notes:
1. CT inputs 1 to be used for protection and for recording of the protected line.
2. CT inputs 2 can be used for second set of line currents for ring bus applications.
3. CT inputs 3 and 4 can be used for recording other AC currents.
Appendix I-1
4. AC Aux Voltage inputs used for line sync and over/under protection, main AC voltage inputs used for line protection.
Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings
5A
+Supply
Relay Standard Output Relay Contacts (All Chassis)

Inoperative
200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228
NC Out1 Out2 Out3 Out4 Out5 Out6 Out7 Out8 Out9 Out10 Out11 Out12 Out13 Out14
+ 334
201 203 205 207 209 211 213 215 217 219 221 223 225 227 229
Power
Supply
Alarm
Optional Output Relay Contacts (4U Chassis)
- 335
422 424 426 428 430 432 434

Out15 Out16 Out17 Out18 Out19 Out20 Out21
423 425 427 429 431 433 435
5A
-Supply
Standard External Inputs (All Chassis)
+ 100 + 102 + 104 + 106 + 108 + 110 + 112 + 114 + 116
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- 101 - 103 - 105 - 107 - 109 - 111 - 113 - 115 - 117
Optional External Inputs (4U Chassis)
+ 400 + 402 + 404 + 406 + 408 + 410 + 412 + 414 + 416 + 418 + 420
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
- 401 - 403 - 405 - 407 - 409 - 411 - 413 - 415 - 417 - 419 - 421
Notes:
1. IRIG-B and comm ports shown separately on L-PRO rear panel layout drawing.
2. All output relays can be programmed to operate on any relay function.
3. All outputs are rated tripping duty, interrupting via breaker aux "a" contact
Figure J.1: L-PRO DC Schematic
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix J-1

Appendix K Function Logic Diagram
Diagram in plastic sleeve.
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix K-1

Appendix L L-PRO Setting Example
Protection, Timers The relay does not block any protection functions or external inputs during the
and I/O Status setting save or active group change, but the external output contacts are reset
for one cycle.
The relay applies the setting parameters, resets all protection functions, resets
all timers and continues to process the protection algorithms but does not apply
any action to the output contacts for one cycle. For close-in (heavy) fault con-
ditions that occur at the time of a setting change the relay performance has a
maximum increase in output delay of one cycle. For light fault conditions the
relay performance does not have a noticeable change. There is normally a one
cycle decision making process. The relay algorithms have been processing and
when the one cycle blocking ends and the contacts are closed immediately
(+3ms hardware delay).
Latch Status The relay does not reset any ProLogic, Group Logic or Virtual Input latch func-
tions during the setting save or active group change. Retaining latch status al-
lows the relay continuous access to specific latched logic states. This is useful
when the relay has ProLogic, Group Logic or Virtual Input functions used to
block protection or ancillary functions for specific operating conditions.
Event Status Reset The relay resets all the events that are currently high and reports states of all
the events that remain high after a setting change.
Viewing Active To view the active setting group and status of the group logic functions in real
Setting Group time via the terminal UI, enter the Metering/Logic/Setting Group menu choice.
To view a snapshot of the group logic data, enter the Settings/Active Group
menu choice.
Front Panel Active View the active setting group with the relay front panel display. There is no ca-
Setting Group pability to change active setting group with the front panel. The front panel dis-
plays 2 lines of data, the first line contains the “Active Setting Group: x”,
where x is the current setting group and flashes. The second line of data dis-
plays the user-defined setting name for the current setting group.
To view the active setting group press the Previous or Next buttons to cycle
through the time/date indication and the serial port settings.
Flash Memory Write The flash memory on the main processor board is capable of approximately
one hundred thousand erases. The retention of the active setting group causes
2 bytes to be written to a memory block in the flash. Each memory block writes
about 65 Kbytes before an erase is performed on the flash memory. An average
of 14 setting group changes per day for the 25 year life of a relay results in the
flash memory being erased only 4 times. Latch states from ProLogic and
Group Logic also performs writes to the flash memory increasing the number
of erases performed on the flash.
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L-1

Switching Setting Groups

You can program a total of 16 Group Logic statements per setting group to
cause a setting change from one group to another. Create settings using the Of-
fliner setting software or by using the Terminal Mode.
Some common uses for setting groups might be cold load pickup, Zone 1 and/
or Zone 2 reach extension for phase and ground distance elements, zero
sequence source increase or decrease.
An example of pulsing an external input and an example of a solid initiate to
activate setting group changes are shown below.
Using One External Use one external input connected to a SCADA output contact to toggle be-
Input to Toggle tween 2 or more setting groups. In this example we connect external input one
Setting Group
(EI 1) to the SCADA control output contact and switch between group 1 and
group 2. If you wanted to switch through all setting groups, group logic 2
would switch to setting group 3, and so forth. If the contact input to switch set-
ting groups becomes welded shut or the SCADA system has a problem, the re-
lay will only switch to the new logic and stay in that logic until the input has
been de-energized for the ProLogic pickup delay, which was set to 10 seconds.
Setting Group 1 – Logic Statements

When setting group one becomes active either through a setting group change
or is the default group after relay power up, ProLogic 9 becomes high after the
10.00 second delay, if EI 1 is low. ProLogic 9 is set for a 0.26 second dropout
time; to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer allowing for the slower pro-
cessing thread where Group Logic is processed and providing a definite timed
pulse to the group logic.
Figure L.1: ProLogic 9
Appendix L-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop-
out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0.52 seconds.
Group Logic 1 is used to switch to the new setting group; there is no intentional
delay. You can also provide 4 additional logic inputs to be used to provide
qualifiers before switching setting groups. The example uses a ProLogic state-
ment and an external input as qualifiers, see example “Using ProLogic to Qual-
ify Group Logic Statements” in Appendix L’ on page Appendix L-8.
Figure L.3: Group Logic 1

Setting Group 2 – Logic Statements

When setting group 2 becomes active either through a setting group change or
is the default group after relay power up, ProLogic 9 becomes high after the
10.00 second delay, if external input one is low. The example shows ProLogic
9 set for a 0.26 second dropout time to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer
allowing for the slower processing thread where Group Logic is processed and
providing a definite timed pulse to the group logic.
Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop-
out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0.52 seconds.
Group Logic 1 is used to switch to the new setting group; there is no intentional
delay.

Using Three Three external inputs connected to an 8 position selector switch. The output
External Inputs to contact is used to build a truth table to toggle between 8 setting groups. In this
Toggle Setting
Group example we connect EI 1, EI 2, and EI 3 to the selector switch output contacts.
Selector
Input States Setting Group to Activate
Switch
EI 3 EI 2 EI 1
1 0 0 0 Setting Group 1
Setting Group 1…8 – Logic Statements

The following Group Logic statements are entered into each of the 8 setting
groups.
When the selector switch is rotated to the appropriate position the correspond-
ing setting group becomes active. Each setting group logic can have a specific
time delay pickup setting. You can also provide 2 additional logic inputs in
each statement to be used to provide qualifiers before switching setting groups.
We are using a ProLogic statement and an external input as qualifiers, see “Us-
ing ProLogic to Qualify Group Logic Statements” in Appendix L’ on
page Appendix L-8.
EI 1 low, EI 2 low, and EI 3 low

EI 1 high, EI 2 low, and EI 3 low
EI 1 low, EI 2 high, and EI 3 low
EI 1 high, EI 2 high, and EI 3 low

EI 1 low, EI 2 low, and EI 3 high
EI 1 high, EI 2 low, and EI 3 high
EI 1 low, EI 2 high, and EI 3 high

EI 1 high, EI 2 high, and EI 3 high
Using ProLogic to You can select from any available ProLogic inputs to make specific blocking
Qualify Group Logic logic to be used as a qualifier for any group logic decisions. In this example we
Statements
use either the zone 1 or zone 2 phase distance elements or the communications
trip or the communications send or the Out of Step outer blinder alarm to drive
the Block Group Logic statement. There is no intentional pickup delay and 0.5
second drop-out delay to hold the block on after the block condition has reset.

79 Auto-recloser examples
You can program up to 4 shots or reclose attempts with the 79 function, with
various lead and follow breaker options. Create settings by using the Offliner
settings software or by using the terminal mode.
79 Recloser Settings
Figure L.16: 79 Recloser
Setting the recloser is all done in one screen.

In our example we are using one shot with an open interval of 10 seconds (T1)
for the Main circuit breaker and a follow interval of 5 seconds (TF) for the aux-
iliary circuit breaker. This means that 10 seconds after both breakers open the
main breaker will attempt to reclose and 5 seconds after the main breaker has
closed the auxiliary breaker will attempt to close. The main and auxiliary close
signal time is set to last for 0.5 seconds (TP). When the recloser receives an
initiation signal that signal will stay high for an additional time of 1.0 seconds
which allows the recloser to seal-in (TDI).
We are not using sync control is this example. If sync control was necessary
the user only has to enable sync control and then set the appropriate settings in
the 25/27/59 screen. For example if Dead Main Dead Auxiliary was selected
the recloser would be blocked unless both main and auxiliary voltages are be-
low 20 volts (positive sequence).
The recloser mode setting is related to the Ring Bus Configuration (auxiliary
CT line input) and must match the breaker configuration in the system param-
eters screen.
Figure L.17: Invalid Action
Most protection schemes require the ability to block the 79 when certain events
happen. In our example we are using Virtual Input 7 (VI 7) to block. The 79
blocking is set to last for an additional time of 1.0 seconds (TDB).

79 initiation is done by simply setting the desired function in the output matrix.
Figure A.1: Output Matrix
The 79 can also automatically move the follow breaker into the lead position
if the lead breaker has been out of service for an extended period of time. The
out of service indication is also used to prevent reclosing attempts to the main
or auxiliary breaker. In our example a breaker has to be opened and stay open
for a time of 120.0 seconds (TC).
The 79 can also be configured with the follow breaker switch setting. In this
example we are using the TF follow time of 5.0 seconds for the 2nd breaker
open interval. The user can use the recloser reset time of TD by selecting the
“close after recloser reset time” setting.
Figure L.18: Breaker Status
52 - Breaker Status can use any external input or ProLogic statement. The re-
closer does not have to be enabled for this logic to work. The 2 circuit breakers
cannot share the same input.

Figure L.19: Invalid Selection
Test Configuration Examples to test the 79 functions using Virtual Inputs and ProLogic to simu-
late the reclose initiation and breaker contact “a” status are shown below.
Virtual Inputs are multi-use logic points that are accessed remotely via SCA-
DA control and/or locally via the terminal user interface (UI).
We will set up 6 virtual inputs to trip and close each breaker and to initiate the
79. You could also use external inputs to provide the breaker “a”, trip, close,
and initiate signals, but by using virtual inputs and ProLogic testing is quicker
and does not require an external DC supply or relays to simulate the circuit
breakers.
Virtual Inputs The Virtual Input (VI) names are used for descriptive purposes. This name will
appear in the event log when the logic point becomes active. The L-PRO Relay
supports 2 circuit breakers and in this example we will name the main circuit
breaker 52-1 and the auxiliary circuit breaker 52-2. Virtual Inputs 1, 2, 3, and
4 will be used as control switches (CS) for tripping and closing while Virtual
Input 7 will be used to enable or disable the 79. Virtual Input 5 is used to trip
circuit breakers 52-1 and 52-2, and to provide recloser initiation. Virtual Input
6 is used to provide recloser initiation without any tripping (used to help test
logic)
Figure L.20: Virtual Inputs

Main and Auxiliary ProLogic statement 1 and 3 are used to provide a common tripping logic point
Circuit Breaker Trip for the circuit breaker this is analogous to creating a dc trip bus to gather the
Logic
trip and no reclose or trip and reclose signals. VI2 and VI4 are (VI2 for main
and VI4 for auxiliary) the trip and no reclose while VI5 is the trip and reclose
(common to main and auxiliary) signal.
Figure L.21: ProLogic 1 – 52-1 Trip
Figure L.22: ProLogic 3 – 52-2 Trip
Circuit Breaker ProLogic statement 2 and 4 are used to provide a simulated logic point for the
Simulator Logic circuit breaker contact “a” status. The output of this logic is used as the input
for the 52 - Breaker Status (see 79 Recloser Settings). The 79 Main Reclose
logic point and VI1 provide the close signal ProLogic 1 provides the trip signal.
The pickup and dropout time delays are used to simulate breaker tripping and
closing times.
Figure L.23: ProLogic 2 – 52-1 “a” Status

Figure L.24: ProLogic 4 – 52-2 “a” Status
Testing The 79 1 Apply the previous settings to the relay.

Recloser
2 Set PL9 to:
3 Set PL10 to:
4 Set PL6 to:

• (used for monitoring purposes)
5 Clear the event log.

6 Check the metering screen for ProLogic. 52-1 and 52-2 should be low.
7 Check the metering screen for Protection. All 79 logic points should be low.
8 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and “close” 52-1 and 52-2 using the Pulse
On action for the virtual inputs. This will activate ProLogic 2 and 4.

9 Check the event log for VI1 and VI3 along with PL2 and PL4.
10 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select “Manual 79 I” using the Pulse
On action for the virtual inputs. This will initiate the recloser but no action
will be taken because the circuit breakers remain closed.
11 Check the event log and confirm there was no reclosure action.

12 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select “52-1, 52-2 Trip&79I” using the
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will trip both breakers and ini-
tiate the reclosing sequence.
13 Check the event log and confirm that 52-1was the first breaker and 52-2
was the second breaker. Check open interval time and follower time, the
close pulse can be measured from the time between PL9 and PL10 going
high.
• T1 - Open interval time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Main Re-
close (shot 1) event.
• TP - Close pulse time equals time from TP start: PL9 event to TP end: PL10
event.
• TF - Follow breaker time equals time from 52-1 “a” status: PL2 event to
79 Auxiliary Reclose (shot 1) event.
14 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select “52-1 Trip 52-CS” using the
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will trip breaker 52-1 and after
timer TC, 52-2 (follow breaker) will move into the lead position.
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will trip breaker 52-2 and initi-
ate the reclosing sequence.

16 Check the event log and confirm that only 52-2 breaker reclosed and was
in the lead position. Confirm that 52-1 breaker did not receive any reclose
attempts.
17 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select “52-1 Close 52-CS” using the
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will close breaker 52-1 and after
a fixed delay of 10.0 seconds breaker 52-1 will move back into the lead po-
sition and 52-2 (follow breaker) will move back into the follow position.
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will trip both breakers and ini-
tiate the reclosing sequence.
19 After 52-1 closes and before 52-2 closes select “52-1, 52-2 Trip&79I” us-
ing the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will trip breaker 52-1
and cause a lockout alarm to be generated and block the follow breaker re-
close attempt.
20 Check the event log and confirm the 79 Lead Lockout event and that there
was no follow breaker reclose attempt.
• 79 Lead Lockout - The time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Lead
Lockout event (approx. TP + 1.0s).

21 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select “52-1 Close 52-CS” using the
Pulse On action for the virtual inputs. This will close breaker 52-1 and after
a fixed delay of TD seconds the recloser will reset.
Communication-
aided Tripping
Schemes L-PRO #1 L-PRO #2
1 2
3 4
F
Figure L.25: Current Reversal Logic example
Current Reversal L-PRO Relays are installed and provide line protection by the tripping Breaker
Logic example #1 and Breaker #2 respectively. A ground fault occurs at location F in the par-
allel line. Initially, 21N2 of L-PRO #2 picks up and sends a permissive transfer
trip signal to L-PRO #1. Since L-PRO #1 detects a reverse fault (21N4 picks
up), it neither trips the breaker nor sends a permissive transfer trip signal.
When breaker #3 opens due to a zone 1 trip, the current reversal condition oc-
curs on L-PRO #1. If the 21P2 on L-PRO #1 operates, and if the received per-
missive transfer trip signal from L-PRO #2 still exists the POTT scheme on L-
PRO #1 will trip breaker #1. To prevent this unwanted tripping on the parallel
line, the L-PRO relay has current reversal logic. The L-PRO current reversal
logic prevents the false trip during this current reversal condition. Gate #116
of the functional logic diagram and timer TL1 and TD1 stretch the zone 4 logic
and block the POTT scheme from tripping the breaker or sending the transfer
trip signal to the remote end.

Communication- The basic selection does not provide any communication-aided logic for local
aided Tripping or remote protections.
Scheme Timer
Considerations
101
Receiver #1
Receiver #2 102 103
PUTT SCHEME (+)
21-2
50N-67R
104 21-4 R 105
Receiver #1 0
Receiver #2 106
(If DCB shceme is TD2
107
selected, Zone 4 must TL2
be set reverse) 0
DCB SCHEME
6ms
108
TWD1
60 110 0
3ms 111
TWD3
TWD2
20ms
0 112
27 V1
113
59 V0 Weak Infeed Enable
WEAK INFEED LOGIC Switch
Receiver #1
120
Receiver #2
(+)
51NAlarm 115
117
TL1
116
TD1
50N-67F 119 DCB PUTT DCB PUTT
114 21-2 118
21P2 POTT BASIC POTT BASIC
21N2
TL3
S
TD3
TL3, TD3 range: 0-1s
SCHEME SELECTOR
POTT SCHEME
Trip
3I0 > Pickup
TCS
Forward 121
0
Non-directional 21N4
(+) 21P4
21N2
21P2
3I0 > Pickup TCB 21N1
Reverse 122 21P1
0
Figure L.26: Communication-aided Scheme

L-PRO Scheme Timers Summary
DCB Scheme Timers
Timer Considerations
TD2 Upon receipt of a Blocking Signal at the local end

from the remote end, TD2 extends the Blocking Sig-
nal to prevent a Scheme Trip.
The Blocking Signal should be extended by:
Time for the local 21-2 to de-assert (~1 cycle) –
Blocking Signal Channel Reset Time (i.e. the time for
the removal of the Block to propagate from the
remote end to the local end) + Security Margin*.
TL2 Delays the local 21-2 from producing a Scheme Trip

for at least as long as it would take a Blocking Signal
to arrive from the remote end.
Should be set longer than the remote end 21-4R (OR
50-67R) detection time (~1 cycle) + Blocking Channel
Time + Security Margin*.
POTT Scheme Timers
TL1 TL1 is intended for Parallel Line applications**:

Delays or prevents scheme trip upon detection of a
current reversal at the local end.
Time Delay should be set to less than: Remote End
21-2 Detection Time (~25msec) + Total End to End
Channel Time
TD1 Also for Parallel Line Applications**:

Extends current reversal blocking of the Scheme Trip
and Send.
Should be set such that it will not block the local relay
if the fault becomes forward and internal. However it
needs to be set long enough to allow the permissive
trip from the remote end to de-assert in the event that
the remote fault reverses (remote external reverse
fault).
So, set local TD2 to: Remote 21-2 Reset Time +
Channel Reset Time + Security Margin*.

Scheme Selector Timers
TL3 Local fault duration must be greater than this time in

order to produce a Scheme Send.
POTT and PUTT = Permissive Trip
DCB = Block Signal (derived from 21-4R (OR 50N-
67R) AND NOT 21-2)
TD3 Stretches the Scheme Send signal to ensure that it's

received by the remote end relay. Set longer than the
channel pickup delay.
Notes:
* Security Margin = 0.5 to 1 cycle or a percentage of total expected time to
account for errors in scheme timing assumptions.
** Parallel Line applications: fault contribution can come from unfaulted
line appearing as a Zone 2 fault at one end and zone 4 reverse fault at the
other end. Depending on the location of the fault on the faulted line and
which breaker clears first, the current may change direction and the 2 ter-
minals on the unfaulted line may change state from forward to reverse and
reverse to forward. The unfaulted line contribution may come either end on
a networked system.

Index
Numerics D
21N ground distance 4-1 date & time 3-3
21P phase distance 4-1 DCB logic 4-43
25/27/59 sync check 4-28 dead line pickup 4-17
46/50/51/67 negative sequence diagnostics 3-14
overcurrent 4-31 display 3-4
50/51/67 phase overcurrent 4-29
50BF breaker failure 4-28
E
erase 3-14
50LS low set overcurrent 4-29
event log 3-13, 4-47
50N/51N/67 neutral overcurrent 4-30,
external input 3-11, 5-8
5-21
59 overvoltage 4-22, 4-23 F
60 loss of potential 4-32, 5-21 fault locator 4-33
68 out of step 4-32 front display 3-1, 3-2, 3-4
79 recloser 4-20
81 frequency 4-26 G
81 over/under frequency 5-21 grounding 2-1
group logic 4-34, 4-35, 5-21, L-8
A
ac and dc wiring 7-1 H
access 3-15 HyperTerminal 2-5
active group 3-11 I
alarm 3-3 ID 3-10, 3-11
analog input 3-11, 5-7 identification 5-6
B initiate swing recording 3-13
backward compatibility 5-4 initiate transient recording 3-13
Base MVA 5-13 inputs
Baud rate external 1-4
direct serial link 2-7 IRIG-B time 2-1
modem link 2-7 installation
software 5-2
C IP address 2-13
calibrate 3-14, 6-2 IRIG 3-2
calibration 6-2 IRIG-B time input 2-1
change 3-15
circuit breaker simulator L-12 L
clear target 3-3 LED lights 3-2
communication line parameters 5-17
direct serial link 2-2 list 3-13
modem link - external 2-3 logic 3-12
modem link - internal 2-4
M
network link 2-4
relay 2-2 maintenance 2-12, 3-14
communication port 2-9 maintenance menu 2-12
communication wiring 7-1 metering 3-12, 3-16
communication-aided scheme 4-40, mho
characteristic shapes 4-2, 6-6
L-18
phase and ground 4-1
creating a setting file from an older
Modbus 3-14
version 5-4
modem link 2-7
CT turns ratio 5-13
D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 I

O system parameters 5-12
Offliner settings 3-1, 5-1 system requirements
output contact 3-14, 5-9 hardware 5-1
output matrix 5-22 operating system 5-1
output relay contacts 1-4 T
P terminal mode 3-5
parameters test mode 3-1, 3-2
line 5-17 testing
system 5-12 21N2 ground distance 6-18
password 3-7, 3-15 21P1 phase distance 6-11
physical mounting 7-1 21P2 phase distanc 6-13
25/27/59 sync check 6-44
ports 3-14
27 undervoltage 6-26
POTT logic L-19
46-50/46-51 negative sequence
power supply 2-1 overcurrent 6-34
ProLogic 5-21 50/51 phase overcurrent 6-31
protection functions 4-1, 5-20 50BF breaker fail 6-38
graphing 5-20 50LS low set overcurrent 6-38
PT turns ratio 5-13 50N/51N neutral overcurrent 6-29
push buttons 3-3 59 overvoltage 6-28
PUTT logic 4-44 60 loss of potential 6-10
PUTT scheme 5-19 68 out of step 6-23
79 recloser 6-46
Q 81 overfrequency 6-41
quadrilateral 4-5, 6-6 81 underfrequency 6-41
quit 3-16 dead line pickup 6-22
directional element 6-36
R external inputs 6-3
recloser L-9 output relay contacts 6-3
record weak infeed 6-20
duration and extension 4-46 testing procedures 6-1
initiation 4-46 time 3-14
length 5-16
storage, retrieval and analysis 4-46 U
RecordBase View software 5-5 utilities 3-14
recording 4-45
V
swing 4-45
version descriptions 2-vii
records 3-13
view 3-15
relay functional 3-1, 3-2
view logs 3-3
retrieve to Offliner 3-12
view readings 3-3
S view settings 5-23
SCADA 3-14 virtual inputs 3-12, 3-14, 5-10, L-11
accessing 2-8
communication parameters 2-8 W
diagnostics 2-8 weak infeed 4-18
monitor 2-13 weak infeed logic 4-44
protocol selection 2-8
scheme selector 5-19
service 3-2
setting group
change 6-25
setting groups 3-11, 5-11, 5-17, L-2
settings 3-11
setup 3-14
start-up 3-1
II L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

L PRO 2100 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L PRO 2100 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L PRO 2100 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L-PRO

Line Protection Relay

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 i

The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:

Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

Right-click Click the right mouse button.

Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.

service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.

.. Indicates more screens.

Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 iii

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 v

Handling Backward Compatibility .................................... 5-4

vi L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

L-PRO Firmware/Software Compatibility Guide

L-PRO Setting File

v5.0 12 4000 v2.0 and greater

v4.0a 12 4000 v2.0 and greater

v4.0 12 4000 v2.0 and greater

v3.5a 12 v3.5 or greater

v3.5 12 v3.5 or greater

v3.4 11 v3.4 or greater

v3.3e 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.3d 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.3c 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.3b 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.3a 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.3 10 v3.3 or greater

v3.2c 9 v3.2 or greater

v3.2b 9 v3.2 or greater

v3.2a 9 v3.2 or greater

v3.2 9 v3.2 or greater

v3.1a 8 v3.1 or greater

v3.1 8 v3.1 or greater

v3.0b 7 v3.0 or greater

v3.0a 7 v3.0 or greater

v3.0 7 v3.0 or greater

Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History.

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 vii

L-PRO Line Protection Relay

L-PRO Relay Functional

Offline Mode - Settings Software

Online Mode - Terminal Mode

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 1-1

4 Zones 4 Zones Dead

27 59 60 81 W.I. Rec. 25/27 Rec. 59 27

Swing Recording Fault Recording

Figure 1.1: L-PRO Function Line Diagram

L-PRO Relay Functional

1. Front display of time, alarms and relay target

1-2 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

7. Port 5 - 10BaseT Ethernet Port/Internal Modem (optional)

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 1-3

1-4 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Optional I/O Rear View

16. This row contains 2 distinctive areas from left to right:

D02333R05.00 L-PRO User Manual 2100 1-5

1-6 L-PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05.00

Ground the relay even when testing.

Do not rely on the rack mounting screws to provide case grounding.